A Series Training Manual - Maintenance Course

Rim Date
Mar., 1993
Revtskn
Fs e d i i Ht
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC-A Series of General Purpose Programmable Cantrollers. Please read this manual carefully so that the equipment is used to its optimum. A copy of this manual should be forwarded to the end User.
MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
1 PC CPU
Accumulator
1.1 Configuration of a PC CPU ................................................. 1.2 Devices ................................................................. 1.2.1 InpuVoutput X and Y ............................................... 1.2.2 Internal relay M and latch relay L ..................................... 1.2.3 Link relay B ........................................................ 1.2.4 Annunciator F ...................................................... 1.2.5TimerT ........................................................... ......................................................... 1.2.6 Counter C 1.2.7 Dataregister D ................................................... 1.2.8LinkregisterW ................................................... 1.2.9 File register R .................................................... \ ................................................... 1.2.10 1.2.1 1 Index registers 2 and V ........................................... 1.2.12 Nesting N ........................................................ 1.2.13 Pointer P ........................................................ 1.2.14 Interrupt pointer I ................................................. 1.3 ParameterSetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.............................................................
1 - 1 - 1-25 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-9 1 -10 1 -11 1 -13 1 -15 1 -16 1 -18 1 -19 1 -20 1 -22
2 ALLOCATION OF I/O NUMBERS
3 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
. .
2.1 I/O Numbers o a Compact Type AOJ2 and AOJ2H ............................ 2 - 1 f 2.2 A2CCPU I/O Allocations ................................................... 2 - 4 2.3 I/O Numbers of a Building Block Type CPU .................................. 2 - 6 2-7 2.3.1 When only a 16-point module is used ................................. 2.3.2 When 32-point and 64-point modules are used ....................... 2-10 2.3.3 1 0 allocation by using parameter setting ............................ 1 2-12 3.1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Electronic Environment ....................................................
3-1
.......................................
- 1 - 2 - 13
........................................ - 1 - 3 - 1 3
3-1
4 HANDLING AND MOUNTING
5 WIRING AND GROUNDING
4.1 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 PC Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Mountinginstructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 lnstallating the AOJ2.AOJ2HCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Installation The A2CCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Installation The AlSCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 Installation the A l . A2 and A3 type CPUs ..............................
...........................................4 - 1 - 4 - 6
4-1 4-2 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6
5.1 Wiring to Base Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 5.2 Wiring Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
.............................................
5-1 -5-7
6 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE
7. TEST OPERATION AND ADJUSTING .................................... - 1 . . 7 7 2 7.1 Check Points Before Start of Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 7.2 Test Operation and Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 8. MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 8-1. . 8 6 8.1 Malfunction Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2 Expendable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 4 Output Relay Lifetimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 4 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 Program Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6
6.1 Common Mode Noise and Normal Mode Noise ............................... 6.2 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4PC Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 External I/O Signal Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 Troubleshooting and Noise Countermeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...............................
-1.. 6 10
6-3 6-3 6 5 6 9
6. 1 6- 2
9 BATTERIES AND FUSES
10 POWER SUPPLY MODULE SELECTION
9.1 Battery Lifetimes 9.2 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...............................................- 1 . - 3 9 9 ......................................................... 9 - 1
10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4
Selecting an Extension Power Supply Module for an AOJ2 or AOJ2H CPU . . . . . 10 . 2 f 10 . 8 Selection o a Power Supply Module for an A1 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of an Extension Power Supply Module for an A2CCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . 13 Selection of a Power Supply Module for an A l . A2. and A3 Type CPU . . . . . . . 10 . 14
..............................
9-3
10
.. . 1 10 19
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 1 MELSEC-A QC Process Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
........................................................
APP
.. . 1 APP 2
APP . 1
.. II
-1. PC CPU
1.
1.1
MELSEC-A
Configuration of a PC CPU
When a PC CPU is considered as a control ladder, it can be expressed as an input ladder, output ladder, and a program as shown below.
PC CPU
---------
PC CPU
Emergency stop
P00
(a) Input ladder
(b) Program
ladder Output (c)
Fg. 1.1 Configuration of a PC CPU
1-1
1. PC CPU
1.2 Devices
MELSEC-A
This section explains the devices that can used for a MELSEC-A. be The number of points that canbe used varies with the type of CPU module.
1.2.1
InpuVoutput X and Y Input/output X and Y are used for communications between a PC CPU and an external device.
(1)
Input X (a)Inputs give commands and data fromexternaldevices such as select switches, limit switches, and digital switches to thePC CPU. (b) As for the l=point input, virtual relay Xn is incorporated in the PC CPU and the N/O contact and N/C contact of that Xn are used in the program. (c) There are no restrictions on the number of Xn N/O contracts and N/C contacts that canbe used in the program.
(d) Input X numbers are expressed in hexadecimal (0 to 9 and A to F).

(2)
output Y (a) Outputs provide program control resultsexternal devicessuch as to solenoids, magnetic switches, signal lamps, and digital indicators. (b) Outputs can be externally fetched as an equivalent to a single N/O contact.
1-2
1. PC CPU
. *
.,. ,=>
..
MELSEC-A
(c) There areno restrictions on the number of Yn N/O contacts and N/C contacts that can be used in theprogram.
r----------
pccpu
1I------I
v
Program
I-+
v
Output 1 d d . r
(d) Output Y numbers are expressed in hexadecimal (0 to 9 and A to F)* (e) An output Y that corresponds to an area loaded with an input unit and an area not loaded with a unit can be used instead of internal relay M.
( f ) If Y is used as an internal relay M, it cannot be latched.
(g) As shown below, output Y is controlled by the RUN keyswitch.
I STOP
RUN
1 Output is turned OFF.

Operation result is output.
PAUSE STOP+RUN PAUSE +RUN
I I
Output in the RUN state is held. After outputting t h e operation result in the STOP state again, the operation result is output. After outputting the output in the PAUSE state again, the operation result is output.
I I
1-3
1. PCCPU
1.2.2
MELSEC-A
Internal relay M and latch relay L are internal aux. relays of a PC CPU that cannot be directly output externally.
(1)
I t r a rsby M and Wch N a y L ne n l
Internal relay M (a) Data is cleared by turning ON the power supply or by switching the reset switch on the front of the CPU to RESET. When the RUN keyswitch is set to STOP, data is cleared by switching the reset switch to LATCH CLEAR. (b)There are no restrictions on the number of internalrelay contacts and N/C contacts that can be usedin the program. (c) Internal relay M numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9). N/O
(2)
Latch relay
(a) The former statewill be held even if the power supply is turned OFF. Data is not cleared even when power supply is turnedON or the the reset switch on the front of the CPU is switched to RESET. (b) There are no restriction on the number o latch relay N/O contacts f and N/Ccontacts that can be used in the program. (c) Latch relay L numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-4
1. PC CPU
1.2.3
MELSEC-A
Link relay B is used for the MELSECNET data link. Link relay B cannot be externally output as output Y.
(1)
Link relay B
Link relay B (a) The B number to be used by the parameter settings link parameter setting by utilizing a peripheral device (such a GPP) is allocated as to link relay 8. A range that is not set can be used instead of an internal relay.
Link range for station 1

to
) The link range cannot be used as an internal relay.

(n = 2 to 6 4 )
B3FF
I)
Usablean internal as
relay in all stations.
(b) There are no restriction on the number of link relay N/O contacts and N/C contacts that can be used in the program. (c) Link relay B numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9, and A to
1.2.4
F).
Annunciator F
The annunciator is used with the external fault detection program that corresponded to the annunciator F number. Therefore, whenan external faultoccurs, thecontents of the fault are detected by using an F number.
(1)
Annunciator F
(a) When an external fault condition goes ON, the F number is stored in a special data register (D9124 to D9132). In addition, a special relay (M9009) goes ON.
(b) When annunciator F goes ON, the ERROR LED on the front of the CPU flashes. If the CPU has a LED indicator, it displays the F number. (c) Annunciator F has a relay function. N/O and N/C contacts can be used with the program.
(d) Annunciator F numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-5
1. PCCPU
1.2.5
MELSEC-A
The PC CPU uses three kinds of upcount timers: 10 msec timers, 100 msec timers, and 100 msec retentive timers. As for number allocation, initial values are set. However, they can be changed in 8-points units.
Example of initial values Set in 8-point units by changing the parameter.
TimerT
100 msec timer
I
199 200
10 msec timer
255
1
0
timer
100 msec
1
timer
10 msec
100 msec retentive timer 255
(1)
100 msectimer T
(a) When the input condition has been established, the measurement is started. And then, when the current value equals the set value, the timer contact goes ON. (b) If an input condition becomes disestablished, the measurement f value o the 100 msec timer becomes 0, and the contact goes OFF. Example
b L 9
Input condition
x5
T2 coil
OFF
msec timer
T2 contact OFF
(c) Set the set value in decimal. When 5.0 seconds is set, it is K50. Also, the data in data register D can be set to a set value (0.1 to 3276.7 seconds). (d) The precision is +2 scan time and -1 scan time. (The time from when the input condition goes ON until the timer contact operates) (e) Timer T numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-6
1. PC CPU
(2)
10 msec timer T
MELSEC-A
(a) When the input condition has been established, the measurement is started. And then, when the current value equals the set value, the timer contact goes ON. (b) If an inputcondition becomes disestablished, the measurement value of the 10 msec timer becomes 0, and the contact goes OFF.
1-p L
condition
T205 coil x5
OFF
F F 0 3
,o
msec T205 contact O OFF
timer
(c) Set the set value in decimal. When 5.00 seconds is set, it is K500. Also, the data in data register D can be set to a set value (0.01 to 327.67 seconds). (d) The precision is +2 scan time and -1 scan time. (The time from when the input condition goes ON until the timer contact operates)
(e) Timer T numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-7
1. PC CPU
(3)
MELSEC-A
100 msec retentivetimer
(a) When the input condition has been established, the measurement is started. (b) And then, when the current value equals the set value, the timer contact goes ON. Even if the input condition becomes disestablished, the current value (measurement value) of the 100 msec retentive timer is held and the contact state does not change. (c) The measurement value of the 100 msec retentive timer becomes 0 by executing the RST instruction, and then the contact goes OFF.
ON
x7
OFF
Input
T254 reset instruction
T254 coil ON T254 contact
OFF
T254 current value 0 --f 1
to 90 + 91 to 100 + 0 + 1 to 60
--t
(d) Set the set value in decimal. When 10.0 seconds is set, it is K100. Also, the data in data register D can be set to a set value (0.1 to 3276.7 seconds). (e) The precision is ascertained by the following formula: +2a scan time to -a scan time a: The number of ON times until count out
(f) Timer T numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-8
1. PC CPU
1.2.6
MELSEC-A
Counter C detects theOWOFF of an input condition an addition expression in and also counts (adds).
(1)
Counter C
Counter C (a) Set the set value in decimal. K1350 is the count that can be added to 1350. Also, data in data register D can be set to a set value. The m a . set value is 32767. (b) The max. count speed is shown below.
Max. count speed (timelsec)
ts: Scan time (unit: msec) n : Duty (%)
(c) Even if the input condition goes OFF, the count value in the counter is not cleared. Use an RST instruction to clear the count value in a counter.
K1350
C8
The C8 contact is operated by the 1350th time X6 goes ON.
Y3 1
Clearing a counter
(d) Some CPUs can use a counter as an interruption counter by creatingacounterintheinterruption program andsetting it inthe parameter as an interrupt. (e) Counter numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-9
1. PC CPU
1.2.7
MELSEC-A
Data register D is the memory where data in the PC CPU is stored. (1) Data register D (a) A 1-point data registeris enabled in 16-bit units. composed of 16 bits. Readwriteis
Data register D
(b) 2 points are used to handle 32-bit data. The data register number designated by the 32-bit instruction holds bits and the designated 16 data register number + 1 holds the higher 16 bits. Example
When the DMOV instruction is used
Data in X0 to 1F is O stored in D and D l .
K5 to 8
K4 or less Dl DO
(c) Data stored in a sequence program is held until other data is stored. (d) Data stored in a data register is cleared by turning ON the power supply or switchingthe reset switch to RESET. Also, when the RUN keyswitch is set to STOP, data is cleared by switching the reset switch to LATCH CLEAR. (e) Values that can be stored
16 bits 32 bits
32768 to 32767 -2147483640 to 2147483647
0 to FFFF
0 to FFFFFFFF
(f) Data register D numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-10
1. PC CPU
1.2.8
MELSEC-A
Link register W is the data register in the MELSECNET data link. (1) register Link W
Lhk r e g W W
(a) The W number to be used by the link parameter setting of the parameter of a peripheral device (such as a GPP) is allocated to the link register. A range that is not set can be used instead of a data register.
to
Link range for station 1 to
~l
W in the link range cannot be used as a data register. (n-2 to 64)
Link range for station n WBFF Available as a data register in all stations.
(b) A 1-point link register composed of 16 bits. Readwrite is is enabled in 16-bit units. (c) 2 points are used to handle 32-bit data. The link register number designated by the 32-bit instructionholds 16 bits and the designated link register number + 1 holds the higher 16 bits. Example
When the DMOV instruction is used Data in X0 to 1 F is stored in WO and W1.
w1
wo
1-11
1. PC CPU
MELSEC-A
(d) Data stored in a link register is cleared by turning ON the power supply or switching the reset switch to RESET. Also, when the RUN keyswitch is set to STOP, data is cleared by switching the reset switch to LATCH CLEAR. (e) Values that can be stored
16 bits 32 bits
-32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to 21 47483647
0 to FFFF
0 to FFFFFFFF
(f) Link register W numbers are expressed in hexadecimal (0 to 9, and A to F).
1-12
1. PC CPU
1.2.9
MELSEC-A
File register R can be used with data register D in the same way as for a sequence program.
(1)
File register R
File register R (a) The file register can be used to enlarge the data register. It can be utilized by setting thenumber of device pointsby using the parameters memory capacity setting. (b) The user memory area is utilized for a file register. is (c) A 1 -point file register composed of 16 bits. Read/write is enabled in 16-bit units. (d) 2 points are used to handle 32-bit data. The file register number designated by the 32-bit instruction holds 16 bits the designated and file register number + 1 holds the higher 16 bits.
Data in X0 to 1F is stored in RO and R 1.

R1
RO
Lower 16 bits (XF to XO)
Higher 16 bits (X1F to XlO)
(e) Data stored in a file register holds its state even when the power supply is turned OFF. Data is not cleared even if the power supply is turned ON or the reset switchis set to RESET. If the RUN keyswitch is set to STOP, data cannot be cleared by switching the reset switch to LATCH CLEAR.
(f) Write 0 by using an MOV(P) or FMOV(P) instruction to clear the file
register.
Example
When RO to 1023 (1 Kpoint) is cleared
1-13
1. PC CPU
( 9 ) Values that can be stored
D cm l ei a
MELSEC-A
Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF
16 bits
-32768to 32767
(h) File register R numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-14
1. PC CPU
1.2.10 Accumulator A
MELSEC-A
Accumulator A is the data register in which the operation results of the basic instructions and application instructions are stored. (1) Accumulator A (a) The operation results of the following basic instructions and application instructions can be stored:
(b) When the above instructions are notused, the accumulator can be used with a sequence program as well as a data register. (c) A 1-point dataregister is composed of 16 bits. enabled in 16-bit units. Read/write is
(d) Two accumulators (A0 and A l ) are provided. Accumulator A0 holds the lower 16 bits and A1 holds the higher 16 bits when used with a 32-bit instruction. Therefore, A1 cannot be designated when a 32-bit instruction is used. (e) Data stored in an accumulator is cleared by turning ON the power supply or switching the reset switch RESET. Also, when the RUN to keyswitch is set to STOP, data is cleared by switching the reset switch to LATCH CLEAR.
(f) Values that can be stored
\ I
16 bits 32 bits
Decimal -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to 2147483647
Hexadecimal
0 to FFFF
0 to FFFFFFFF
(9) Accumulator A numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-15
1. PC CPU
1.2.1 1 Index r gse s 2 and V eitr
MELSEC-A
Index registers 2 and V add contents to device (X, Y, M, B, L, F,T, C, D, W, R, K, H, and P) numbers and indirectly change device numbers. Devices to be allocated vary with the type of CPU module. (1) Index registers 2 and V (a) Program example Example
159 165
I
I 1
DSZ means D(5+Z) = DE
(b) An index register can be used for a sequence program as well as a data register. (c) A I-point index registeris enabled in 16-bit units. composed of 16bits. Read/write is
(d) Index register Z holds the lower 16 bits and V holds the higher 16 bits. Therefore, V cannot be designated when a 32-bit instruction is used. Example
Data in X0 to 1 F is stored in V and Z.
V Higher 16 bits
(X1F to X10)
Lower 16 bits (XF to XO)
(e) Data stored in an index register is cleared by turning ON the power supply or switching the reset switch to RESET. Also, when the RUN keyswitch is set to STOP, data is cleared by switching the reset switch to LATCH CLEAR.
1-16
1. PC CPU
(1) Values that can be stored
MELSEC-A
I 16 bits I I 32 bits I
(a)
-32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to 2147483647
0 to FFFF
0 to FFFFFFFF
I I
Index registers Z and V numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
21 to 26 and V1 to V6 can be used only with an A2A and A3ACPU. The shows the combinations for handling them as 32-bit data.
following chart
v1
21
I I
v2 v3 v4 v5 V6
22
23
24
I
I
25
26
1-17
1. PC CPU
1.2.12 Nesting N
MELSEC-A
Nesting devices (nestingstructures) are used for master control MC instructions.
(1)
Nesting N (a) Master control's nesting (N)is used from the lower numbers. (NO to N7) If nesting is not used, the same number's N can be used anytime. (b) The conditions for turning ON the master controls are as follows:
1 -
I I
MC
m J ..........
N O
1 ..........Whencondition Agoes ON
.......... When conditions A and B go ON
when coditions A, B, and c go ON
II '
B
I I I I
MC
N1
M16
MC
N2
1 M17
Executed when condition A is established.
Executed when conditions A and B are established.
Executed when conditions A, B, and C are established. The N2 to N7 condition is canceled. Executed when conditions A and B are established.
(c) The timer and the counter when the master control goes OFF are as follows: 0 100 msec timer and 10 msec timer: Count value becomes 0. 100 msec retentive timer: The state of the present count value is retained. Counter: The state of the present count value is retained. 0 OUT instruction: All are turned OFF. 0 SET and SFT instructions: An output that went ON stays ON. (d) Nesting N numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
4 ! I
MCR
N O
P'
MCR
N1
The N1 to N7 condition is canceled. Executed when condition A is established.
The N to N7 condition is O canceled. Executed independently of conditions A, 6 , and C.
1. PC CPU
1.2.13 Pointer P
MELSEC-A
Pointer P shows the jump destination of branch instructions (CJ,SCJ, CALL, JMP). The pointer number put at the head of the program of a jump destination is called a label.
(1)
Pointer P
(a) If the same label is used several times, an error occurs.
(b) P255 always shows END. P255 can be used as a device for CJ and SCJ instructions, etc. However, it cannot be used as a label. Nor can it be used as a CALL instruction device.
Pointer
P20 50 1
+ +2
C J
P20
When X13 goes ON, the POgram jumps to label P2U (step 501).
When X17 goes ON, the program jumps to END.
(c) When the CHK instruction is used, P254 is used as a label of the CHK instructions ladder block. When the CHK instruction is not used, P254 can be used in the same way for PO to 253.
(d) Pointer P numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-19
1. PC CPU
1.2.14 Interrupt pointer I
MELSEC-A
Interrupt pointer I is used as a jump destination(label) to interrupt the execution of a main program and execute an interrupt program that corresponds to an interrupt factor with the highest priority when an interruption occurs. However, an El instruction for interruption enabledis necessary at the head o the main program. f
(1)
Interrupt pointer I (a) Interrupt pointer I is put at the head of the interrupt program as a label.
Label
\115
I 1
I I
I I
*
Interrupt program
(b) The use o interrupt pointers is shown below. f
I
High
Interrupt Pointers
Interrupt Sequence Program Start Factors Process interrupt Unit (A161) 1st point interrupt 2nd point interrupt
IO
=eHigh
16th point interrupt

1 st unit
Sequence start occurrence unit
(AD51 1
unit Unusable
6th
The number of the units to be used varies with the CPU module.
=t++
High
Low
Interrupt every 40 msec Interrupt every 20 msec 131 t e m p t every 10 msec
1-20
1. PC CPU
MELSEC-A
(c) When 129 to 131 exist in a program, the programjumps to the interrupt program at every interruption time and is executed.
Sequence program
129
130
131
Interrupt every 40 msec Interrupt every 20 msec Interrupt every 10 msec
n no
131
131
131 130
131 130 129
! I ]
(d) Pointer I numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).
1-21
1. PC CPU
1.3
MELSEC-A
When operating the GPP/PHP, set the parameters prior to the mode selection. The parameter setting refers to the setting of parameters which meet the used system before performing the creation of program. When the parameter setting is not performed (initial status), values shown in the following table are automatically set to the parameters as default values.
AW
CPU
Parameter Setting
*
No wtling
A1SC
T
O ampa K
+u
A1CCU
1WQU
WwR nb
w u nn ~ r
6K a m p
0 0 14Kb,tr
No d n g
I
No u m n p
Ho h O point K
n g
. e1 K c - h
O point K
O poirt K
0 to I B o C u
OK b b y
OK byle
OK
b* y
I
ObLOSZ
S h l r Ielch
NO
Y* O
, ,
DO b 1023 WOto3FF in ylm 01

IKpoint
00 10 3FF TO 10 255 co to 255
m m
No
BO to 5FF TO h) 255 co to 256 DO b I023
Y..Rlo Y.Utl0
I I
No
WObOFF in w m of
1 point
L a rnmbr &
mod.
-I-
numbu 1 ID A to 0 9.
hu8dwmel
Fl
6 LgtIs of
-I
fo IO 9. A t F o
1-22
1. PC CPU
1.
.'I.,
. , .,
MELSEC-A
mJ
mrr
I -*I-
XK)
Ins
No ni p a n
10 ms:
Tmmw
w.
r i ~ . n t
No
Howrap
N nrjy a
No un tlp b
IPOINTS~
(1) '1: When the AOJ2 is used, only 95 points o comment data (FO to f F94) can be transferred. When the A1 CPU is used, only 128 points (FO to F127) can be transferred. After setting each parameter, always press [END]. If another (2) screen is desplayed without pressing [END], the old data is valid and the new data is not entered. To return to the preceding screen, also press [END].
1-23
I.PC CPU
MELSEC-A
1%.
6K 8-
6K 8O b K b
O sbp K
O e K
O b a m
0 to 4-K
No
(k
m
No
Y Y
d d
No
Mt05FF TO b 5 Z6
dh-C
120
YO 0 em .loo0 b 1017
2W 11 18
, , ,
_I_/_
Tin unia d
- I yhlsob
2047
IOms
1 J
200 m 8
2 W m y hd
1-24
1. PC CPU
-_I
..',
MELSEC-A
Due to the capacity of CPU memory and memory cassette, it is dometimes impossible to set the capacity for programs, file registers and comments all at the maximum value.
2. ALLOCATION OF I/O NUMBERS

2.
2.1
MELSEC-A
ALLOCATION OF I/O NUMBERS

10 Numbers of a Compact Type A M 2 and AOJ2H 1 In the case of compact types, the X/Y numbers are decided automaticallyby the I/O module's setting numbers. I an AGGPP is used, I/O allocation cannot be done. f Since the allocation of I/O numbers is one of the necessary conditions for configuring a system, if the allocation is wrong, it will cause a malfunction. This section explains the allocation of an I/O module's I/O numbers.
(1)
Each I/O module and extension unit slot occupies 64 points. The allocations of input (X) and output (Y) are as follows. (a) Input (X) ..........First 32 points (b) Output (Y) ....... Latter 32 points
r
II
Example - - - - - When the I/O module setting number is 0, the I10 numbers of each I/O module areas follows:
AOJ2-E24 (24-point module)
- - - -
AOJ2-E32 AOJ2-E28 AOJ2-ES6 (32-point (28-point (56-point I module)
Vacant
(2)
The head I/O numbers of an I/O module is provided as follows in accordance with the I/O module setting numbers:
Sefflng
0
2
X80 YAO
3
XCO
6 X180
Headinput number Headoutput number
X00 Y20
X40 Y60
X140 X100 X1CO YlEO YE0 YlAO
Y160
Y120
(3)
Allocations of I/O numbers are not done in the order of a connection o an extension cable connections. They are allocated in the order of f I/O module setting numbers.
2-1
(I.
MELSEC-A
Example of I/O number allocations in an AOJ2 or AOJPHCPU system

1) The number of occupied inputloutput points per module is 64 points. 2) The 1 0 number is decided by the 10 1 1 module number (0 to 7 ) . Section 3.2.2 of the User's Manual (110 module) gives details about how to set I/O module numbers.
1 2 1
4
X40 to X5F Y60 to Y7F X80 to X9F YAO to YBF XCO to XDF YE0 to YFF X100 to X1 1F Y120 to Y13F
I-
1 1
4) Since the number of occupied I/O points per module is 64points, when 24 points are used. 40 points are unused. However, it is notnecessary to change a currently used I/O number even if the I/O module is exchanged in the future.
5 ) The numbers that correspond to the input numbers and unused numbers (32 points of t h e latter half in the case of a special module) can be used instead of the internal memory (M). However, t h y cannot be used in the case of a dedicated input module.
3) Max. 8 I 0 modules can be connected. 1
1 ' 1
X1 40to X15F Y160 Y17F to X180 to X19F YlAO to Y1BF X1CO to XlDF YlEO to YlFF
1
L
6) Make sure the same 1 0 module n u m k r 1 is not used more than once in systhe tem, since doing so causes a malfunction.
7)The I/O module numbers are0 to 7. However, it isnot necessary to allocate i/O module numbers inorder. 110 numbers are determined by 1 0 module num1 bers as shown to the left. However, Mitsubishi recommends sening consecutive numbers from the standpoint of I/O numbers.
Fig. 2.1 Allocation Example
2-2

(4)
MELSEC-A
When an extension base unit is used, the 10 numbers start from / W 00. l
Example of 10 number allocation using an extension base unit composite system /
MOdUk
110
No. 0
1
10 Numbor 1
X00 to X1F Y20 to Y3F X40 to X5F Y60 to Y7F X80 to X9F YAO to YBF XCO to XDF YE0 to YFF
1 0 number 1
2 3 Slot No. on the extension base unit
1 1
H I I
2) The extension base unit is always positioned in tha final stage of the system, and the I10 number always begins with WY100. (The number of stages is set to 1 stage.)
3) The n u m h s that correspond to an input number and unused numbers an in AOJ2 I10 module system can be usod as the internal memory (M). However, they cannot be used in the case of a dedicated input module. connected in an extension base unit composite system. Set t h e 1/0 unit number to 0 to 3 .
1) The number of occupied moduie inputsloutputs is 64 points. (The number of occupied inpuWwtputs of the 10 1 module in an extension base unit is also 64 points.)
,iw. ;:w 4) A max. of 4 A N 2 110 modules canbe ::&g::: @ ig#+

:,.:.:.::.::::j.:
.....:.:::.:.:.:.:.::
X100 to X13F YlOO to Y13F
#!$$
#T
I
I
X140 to X17F Y140 to Y17F X180 to X1BF Y180 to YlBF
Slot No.
Restrictions with an extension base unit
When a 64-point module is used, there are no restrictions. When a 32-point module is used, the latter 32 points are not used. However, in reality, the first 32 points and latter 32 points are lapped during CPU access. Therefore, if an I10 number in the latter half is used in the program incorrectly, the AOJ2/AOJ2H behaves as if an 110 number in the lapped first haif has been accessed. For example, 160 is lapped by 140, and 170 is lapped by 150. When a 16-point module is used, the latter 48 points are not utilized. The AOJ21AOJ2H regards those 48 points as a lap of 4 16-point modules. For example, if 110, 120 or 130 is accessed, it behavesas if 100 had been accessed. Always be sure to use actual 110 numbers in the program. XN100-10F are the actual I10 numbers in the example on the left.
Fig. 2.2 Example of 10 Number Allocations ina Composite System 1
2-3

2.2
MELSEC-A
APCCPU 10 Allocations 1
The A2CCPU uses 1 0 numbers to control communications with I/O modules 1 and remote terminals. The I/O numbers are allocated with W O to W1FF in the order of station numbers set by using the station number setting switch on each module. Note that the I/O number allocations are not executed in the order I/O modules and remote terminal modules are connected.
(1)
Station numbersand I/O number allocations Each station is allocated in 8-point units. Stations 1 to 64 can be set. The following table shows the correspondence between stationnumber settings and I/O number allocations.
Table 2.1 Correspondence between Station Numbers and UO Numbers
14 15 16
X N 6 8 to 6 F X N 7 0 to 77
X N 7 8 to 7F
30 31 32
W E 8 to EF to F7 W F 8 to FF
46
XN168 to 16F
62 63
W1E8 to 1 EF
47 XNFOW 1 7 0 to 177
48 to 17F
W l F O to 1F7
X N l F 8 to 1FF 64 XN178
2-4

(2)
MELSEC-A
Correspondence of occupied points and station numbers (a) If the number of I/O module and remote terminal module I/O points is 8 or more, one module occupies several consecutive station numbers. Station numbers occupied by one module cannot beset to other modules. (b) Set the station numbers to I/O modules and remote terminal modules so that the numbers are consecutive. When modules which occupy 8 or more points per module are used, set the head station number of the station numbers occupied by the modules as the station number of the module.
Set station No. : 14
&point 110 module Occupied stations: 1
Set - - - - - - - - . - - - - - - station No. : 1
I/O module
&point
Set station No. : 6
I I I 1
32-point 1 0 module 1
Occupied stations: 1
I/O module
32-point
Set station No. : 2
S e t station No. : 10 (Station numbers 10 to 13 are occupied.)
Fig. 2 3 Station Number Setting Example .

POINTS
(1) Setting the same station number may cause a wrong input or out-
put. When setting a station number, be careful not to use the same station number or a lapped station number when taking the number of occupied inputs/outputs into consideration.
(2) If a station number is skipped, the skipped station number becomes a faulty station, and then M9061 goes ON. The ERR LED on the front of the A2C lights.
2-5
2. ALLOCATION OF 10 NUMBERS 1
2.3
MELSEC-A
110 Numbers of a Building Block Type CPU
When a building block type (AlS, A1 to A3 type) CPU is used, I/O modules can be allocated anywhere. Whenan 1/0 module is allocated to the base, the I/O numbersare set automatically. X or Y numbers must be used in the program. I/O numbers can be divided into "parent numbers" 00 (determined by the number of I/O points of the module used in each slot) and "child numbers" 0 (hexadecimalsubdivisions of parent numbers) as shown in the following example. Example) Input: X
2E
: .
. .: . i i
; (child number)
. . i Module'sonehexadecimalcharacter
One or two hexadecimal characters decided by the number of module I/O points (parent number) I/O numbers in the case of 16-point and multi-point modules are explained below.

2.3.1
MELSEC-A
When only a l w i n t module is used

(1) Mainbaseunit's I/O numbers
I IZ
000 010 020 030 040

01 1 02 1 012 022 013 023 014 024 015 025 016 026 017 027 018 028 019 029 01 A D2A 018 028 01c 32c 01 D 32D 01 E 32E 01F -
(03)
031 041 032 042 033 043
' r
(MI (05) ( 0 6 )
1
(07) -Parent numbers 1 00 to
Child numbers 0 to F
When there is an extension base
11 I
OUT
006 007 008 009 OA O 008
OOC
OOF
OOD
OE O
Base with 2 modules
035 045 036 046 037 047 038 048 039 049 03A 04A 038 048 03c 04C 03D 040 03E 04E 04 F @ -
034 044
1.
Base with 8 modules
Fig. 2.4 Extension Bases (1bPoint Module) Modules to the right of the CPU on the base unit are allocated order in to parentnumbers 00 and 01. The hexadecimalnumbers ofeach module are the child numbers. For example, when input module X is allocated to parent number 00, the input numbers become XOOO, XOO1, and X002, X003 ....XOOF. When output module Y is allocated to parent number 02, the output numbers become Y020, Y021, Y022,YO23....Y02F. In the case of XOO1, it is displayed as X1 (the higher 0 is omitted). The blank which has no allocated module occupies 16 points. Therefore, this number is not used. If a module is allocated to the blank, the number is used. When temporary memory M runs short. A blank virtual Y can be used as a temporarymemory.However, be careful the number is not renumber peated if an output moduleis allocated later. in such a case, the of virtual Y used as the temporary memory must be changed.
2-7
-2. ALLOCATlON OF I/O NUMBERS

(2) I/O numbers of a extension base unit
MELSEC-A
When 16-point modules are used independently of a main base unit (See Fig. 2.5), the module furthest to the left of the first extension base unit is considered parent number 08 and numbers are allocated sequentially. The second extension base starts from parent number 10 and the third extensionbase starts from parent number 18. The advantage here is that the extension base I/O numbers do not change even if a main base unit with 2, 5, or 8 modules is used. There are extension bases with 5 modules and with 8 modules, as shown in Fig. 2.6. When either is used, the next stage's extension base number does not change and starts from parent number 10 or parent number 18. 256 I/O points are displayed in hexadecimal from 000 to OFF, and 512 points are displayed in hexadecimal from 000 to 1FF.
2-8

Maln base unit
( W (09) (OA) (OB) P C ) (OD) (OE) ( 0 0 (00) (01) (02)(03)(04) 080 O OAO O B 0 O C O OD0 OEO OF0 W 001 OAl OB1 OC1 OD1 OEl OF1 081
OC2 OD2 OC4 OD4 OC5 OD5 OC7 OD7 OC8 OD8 OCS OD0
MELSEC-A
082 092 O OB2 M 083 O OA3 OW W 084 O S 4 OA4 084 085 095 OA5 OB5 O H O OA8 O W W poww 097 OA7 OB7 087 OUT
068 O OA8 088 W O O S 9 OAQ OB9 W 08A OQA O M O M 086 098 OAB OBB
OC3 OD3 OE3
ocd OD6
IN
OCB ODB OBC W C OAC OBC OCC O M : OBD 09D OAD OBD OCD ODD O8E 09E OAE OBE OCE ODE 0 9 F 0 8 FOBF OCF OAF
O C A ODA
OFA OEB OFB OEC OFC OED OFD OEE OF OEF OFF ODF
O U
OE9 O F 9 numb.r
OF2 OE2 OF3 OF4 OE4 OF5 OE5 O B OF8 OE7 OE8 OF8 bm "It
O n
(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)(15) 100 102 111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1' 101 131 141 121
(16) (17)
170 180 150 140 130 120 110 171 161 151 081 OAl 091 OB1 182 172 152 142 132 122 112 082092 O A 2 OB2 163 173 153 143 133 123 113 103 083 093 OA3 O B 3 084 094 OA4 O B 4 085 095 OA5 OB5 O B 8 O S 6 OA6 0 8 8 087097 OA7 OB7 suPP'y 068 O OA8 OB8 W OC1 OC2 OC3 OC4 OC5 Number 1 of a OC6 main base unit OC7 OC8 with 5 modules (OD to OF are not used.)
1' 1 1
1'
(18) (19) ( 1 4 ( 1 6 ) ( I C ) ( I D ) (1E) ( I F ) 180 190 1AO 1 8 0 181 1 9 1 1 A l 192 182 184 1FO 1EO 1DO 1CO 1C11 F 1 1 E l 161 1 E 2 l F12 2 1 C 2 1 8 2 1 A 2 0 1D3 1C31 F 3 l E 3 183 1A3 193 183 194 1A4 8 4 1 1C4 1 1E4 1F4 04 1A5 195 185 1F5 1E5 1D5 1C5 165 1C6 l D 8 186 1A6 196 188 1F6 1E6 1D7 1E7 1F7 Extension 197 1C7 187 1A7 bade 198 1A8 1 6 8 1C8 1D8 1E8 1F6 1D9 1C9 169 1A9 199 1F9 1E9 1CA 1BA 1AA l9A 1FA 1EA 1DA 1 C B 1DB 5 1 1FB 1 9 8 1 8 8 1 8 1EB A B 19C 18C 1FC 1EC 1DC 1CC 1BC 19D 18D 1FD 1ED 1DD 1CD 1BD 1AE 19E 18E 1FE 1EE 1DE 1CE IN1BE 19F 1AF 1DF 1EF 1FF1BF 1CF 1D1
Starts from 10.
I I
Power 187 supp'y 188
189 18A
.I
IN
18F
'1
1104111411241134l14.l 125 135 145 Number 2 of a 128 136 main base unit 127 137 128 138 148 with 5 modules 15 to 17 are 11091119l 129 139
iz
~10AB / 1 l B 1 lO 11A 1AC 1 o c 1 1 c 120 13D 4 0 1D 1 1 1AD 1OD 10E 11E 14E 1OF 1 2 E l l 3 E 14F 12F
13F
11F
~~
~~~~~
Fig. 2.5 Extension Base Units (16-point)
Fig. 2.6 Combination Examples
2-9

2.3.2
MELSEC-A
W m 32gdnt and 64-poinl modules are used h

The basic idea is same as when 16-point modules are used. When using16-point modules, 16 points must beallocated to thebase module 1. When using 32-point modules, 32 points must be allocated to the module 1,and continuous numbers are utilized by shiftingthe numbers. When using 64-point modules, 64 points must be allocated to module 1. In the case of a special module, pay attention to the number of occupied I/Os and the allocation. Allocation examples are given below.
.nts nts nts
its
'nts
Upply C P U 007
~ 0 0 1 (01) (05) (07) (OB)( o c ) 000 010 050 070 OB0 to OB1 001 to 0 0 2 E =OB2 tu (02) (06) OB3 020 080 084 E 005 to 085 O w 02F 05F OBF
(OD) (11)
:g
009 030 060 OOA to 006 03F
ow (03)
OgF OBB OOC(a4) (OA)OBC OOD 040 OAO OBD OOE to to OBE OOF 04F 05F OAF OBF
mi-
32
nts (131 130 to
13F (14) 140 to
14F -
Fig. 2.7 Main Base Unit Example (Mutti-Point Module)
( 0 8 ) (09)
090 089 E to OBA 5
:E
(OE)
OED
OD0 110 to ODF
to OEF 05F, Main base (OF) (12) unit OF0 120

Io
(10)
100 to 1OF 05F
-rI I I Extension base unit 1 number 1 I I I

I I
I'
'N
poi(OE) (010
16 x (8 5) becomes in vacant numberthe the case of a main base unit wim 5 modules. Then, start from I me number. next
'
Extension base unit number I
-L-
Fig. 2.8 Combination Example (MuttCPoint Module)
2- 10
MELSEC-A
In the example in Fig. 2.7, parent number 0 is allocated to the 16-point module. If the module in the next slot is allocated 64 points, numbers 010 to 04F are occupied. As shown below, consecutivehexadecimalnumbers utilize the same method. 16 points are allocated for the empty slot in which a module is not allocated (parent number OC). (1)
10 numbers of an extension base /

The extension base in Fig. 2.7 starts with parent number 13 consecutively from the numbers of the main base unit. However, as shown in Fig. 2.8, in the case of a main base unit with 5 modules, I/O numbers skip anumber of points (16X 3). The 3 indicates the difference between main base units with8 modules and mainbase units with 5 modules. Therefore, the I/O number must be after parent number 08 certainly, because 16 points are allocated to a virtual slot. In the case of an extension base with 5 modules, the VO number of the X 3). The 3 next extension base skips the number ofpoints(16 indicates the difference between extension base units with 8 modules and extension base with 5 modules. Blank and additional modules The blank in which a module is not installed occupies 16 points. When a32-point or 64-point module is added to parent number OC after creating the program of Fig. 2.7, all I/O numbers on the rightside of the module shift to the back. Therefore, be very careful when a program is changed. When a 64-point module is installed in blank parent number OC, parent numbers OC, OD, OE, and O are usedin this slot, and parent F number O on the right side becomes module 10. Therefore, all the D following I/O numbers must be changed. If a 16-point module is added to parent number OC, the I/O numbers do not change. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the fact, a many-point module can be added like this, and the number of occupied inputs/outputs cannot be changed between 32 points and 64 points. However, there are following two methods: (a) Dummy module (AG62) A dummy module is a kind of a blank cover. However, it has the number ofpointssettingswitch. 16 pointsor 64 pointscan be secured in advance by using this switch. If the use of an additional module is expected, insert a dummy module into the base unit to which the number of points is set. (b) Adding a module after the final base module.
If a module is added after the final module allocated to the base, the existing I/O numbers do not change. In this case,do not prepare a blank in the middle.
(2)
2- 11
2. ALLOCATION OF 10 NUMBERS 1
2.3.3 VO allocatkn by using parameter s ti g et n
,,
MELSEC-A
I/O numbers can be allocated by the GPP's parameter setting.

(1)
I/O allocation is done for the following three reasons: If there is an empty slot in the base, 16 points are usually occupied. But 16 points of the I/O number of points can be saved by / setting 0 points by using I/O allocation, thus enabling the 10 slot to be effectively put to practical use.
When there is an empty slot, it is possible to reserve the number of points without a dummy module by setting 32 points, 48 points, or 64 points to expand the system in the future. By setting the I/O allocation, even when a faulty module is removed, the I/O numbers do not change. If a 32-point module is removed when I/O numbers are not allocated, for example, number of occupied inputs/outputs becomes 16 points, and the numbers change. allocation by an A6GPP
0,16, 32, 48, or 64 points can be allocated to a slot. The number of vacant points (0,16, 32, 48, or 64 points)(S), the number of input points (16, 32, 48, or 64 points) (X), the number of output points (16, 32, 4 8 , or 64 points) (Y), or the number of special-function points (16, 32, 48, or 64 points) (F) are allocated. 1/0 numbers are allocated by the set number of points.
Allocate the number of points that is the same as the number of installation points in the slot where a special-function module is installed by setting special function (F). If the setting is different, an error occurs. The number of installation points is allocatedto the slot that was not set.
If a number of points that is fewer than the numberof installation points of an I/O module is set, the number of actually utilized I/O points decreases.
Example) Installation: 32 input points, I/O allocation: If 16 input points have been allocated, the 16 points in the latter half of an input module cannot be used.
If the number of points that has been set is greater than thenumber of installation points of the I/O module, the number of points that exceeds the number of installation points becomes the number of dummy points. If vacant (S) is set for a slot which is installedto the I/O module, the I/O module becomes unusable.
2- 12

(3)
MELSEC-A
How to read I/O allocations using an AGGPP I/O number allocations can be read using an AGGPP by the following key operations:
(a) To read PC parameters
Select parameter or parameter + main.
(b) To read only the parameters I/O allocations
I this list is blank, I/O numbers have not been allocated by the f AGGPP.
(4)
Peripheral devices other than an AGGPP I/O numbers cannot be allocated by AGPU, A7PU, and an A7PUS. I/O numbers can be allocated by AGHGP, AGPHP, and an A7PHP.
2 - 13
3. INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT
3 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT .
3.1
MELSEC-A
Installation Environment Never install the CPU system in the following environments:
(1) (2)
Locations where the ambient temperature is outside the range of 0 to 55 "C. Locations where the ambient humidity is outside the range of 10 to 90 %RH. Locations where dew condensation takes place due to sudden ternperature changes. Locations where there are corrosive and/or combustible gasses. Locations where there is a high level of conductive powder (such as dust and iron filings, oil mist, salt, and organic solvents). Locations exposed to direct rays of the sun.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7) Locations where strong power and magnetic fields are generated.
(8)
Locations where vibration and shock are directly transmitted to the main module.
32 .
Electronic Environment
(1)
The fluctuation range of a 100 V or 200 V power supply must be within +10 OO to -15 %. / If the ambient temperature is above 50 "C, use a PC at approx. 100 o voltage. / o Momentarypower failure times If not longer than 20 msec, operations are continued. Powersupplywaveform distortion It should be a sine waveform, and the distortion factor should be within 5 %. Pay particular attentionto the power capacitor and the rectifier. Wiring should be as far as possible from high-tension wires and large current lines. When parallel, intervals should be 100 mm or more.
Do not store PCs and noise generators on the same board. Store high-frequency devices, inverters, electrical discharge machines, etc. on a separate board, and store them as far as possible from PCs. Wiring should be separated.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
3-1
4. HANDLING AND MOUNTING

4.
4.1
MELSEC-A
HANDLING MOUNTING AND

Handling
Since the electronic parts which are installed on the printed circuit board are influenced by static electricity, pay special attention to the following when handling a printed circuit board directly:
0 0
Ground the human body or work bench. Do not directly touch the conducting area and electric parts of a product. Handling modules
0
(1)
Secure each module to the base unit correctly. Do not insert or remove a module during power ON (doing so might cause a wrong input). Do not touch the gold plating on a printed circuit board (doingso will cause a contact fault).
(2)
Handling the memory

0
When mounting the memory, be sure to fit the memory in the proper direction as indicated on thesocket. Also, make surethe connectors are properlyset and do notprotrude. Do not touch the memory leads. Also, makesure the leads are not bent.
Fq.4.1 How to Hold the Memory

Whenremovedorstored,alwaysput the memory in the supplied case. Never place the memory on metal, which may allow current flow, or on any object (such as wood, plastic, vinyl, fiber, cable, or paper) which is charged with static electricity,.
EP-ROM memory Make every effort to keep the glass face and leads of the ROM free from finger smudges and oils. If any does get on the ROM, wipe it off with alcohol. A mask tape is attached to the ROM to prevent ultraviolet rays from erasing programs. When erasing aprogram, peel off this mask tape. Several minutes direct exposure to sunlight will erase programs. Longer exposure (an hour or more) to light from a fluorescent lamp will erase programs. IC-RAM memory If this is removed during program writing, the program is erased.
4-1

4.2
MELSEC-A
PC Installation
This section explains how to install a PC and gives precautions to take when doing so.
4.2.1
Mounting instructions Explanation is given to the instructions for mounting the PC to a panel, etc. To improve ventilation or facilitate the replacementof unit, provide 80 mm (3.15 in.) or more the clearance around the PC. (AlSCPU: 30 mm (1.18 in.)or more)
t ion.
Do not mount the base unit vertically or horizontally to allow ventila-
Ensure that the base unit mounting surface is uniform to prevent strain. It excessive force is appliedto the printed circuit boards, this will result in incorrect operation. Therefore, mount the base unit on a flat surface. Avoid mounting the base unit close to vibration source, such as largesized magnetic contactors and no-fuse breakers, install the base unit in another panel or separate the base unit fromthe vibration source. Provide a wiringduct as necessary. PC However, if the dimensions from the top and bottom of the are less than those shown in Fig. 4.3,note the following points:
(a) When the duct is located above the PC, the hight of the duct should be 50 mm (1.97 in.) or less to allow for sufficient ventilation.
50 mm or less
80 mmor more (30 mm or more in
the case of AlSCPU)
~~~
~~
~~~~~
Fig. 4.2 Duct Measurement Set the distance from the top of the PC so that the hook latch at the top of the module can be pushed. If the hook latch at the top of the module cannot be pushed, the module cannot be replaced. (b) When the duct is located under the PC, install the duct so that optical fiber cables or coaxial cables may be connected and also consider the minimum bending radius of the cable.
All other equipment should be installed at least 100 mm (3.94 in.) away from the PC to protect it from heat and noise.
The bases must be installed at least 50 mm (2 in.) away from any equipment on both sides.
4-2

4.2.2
MELSEC-A
lnstallating the A U 2 , AOJZHCW This section describes the installation of the module.
h
AOJ2
AOJ2-E AOJ2
79 (3.1 1)
(1) Mounting PU to
120 (4.72)
(2) Mounting to 1 0 PU 1 module and CPU combination
(3) Mounting PU to 2 10 modules and 1 CPU combination
Unit: mm (in.)
Fig. 4.3 Dimensions in Moduleto Module Mounting

The panel ceiling, wiring duct, and component position indicated. rAOJ2C03
1
80 (3.15)
AOJ2C06 50 to 70 (1.97 to 2.
3.54) '1: When the duct is placed in 80 (3.15) clearance, select a proper duct.
E56
Fig. 4.5
Unit: mm (in
~~
Fig. 4.4 Side-teSide Installation
Top to Bottom installation

Unit: mm (in.)
'Extension base (A55B, A65B) (1) Side to side installation
unit Extension base unit
Fig. 4.6 Installation of Extension Base Unit
POINTI
Fig. 4.7 Horizontal Installation (not allowed)
The distance from the CPU module front to the external device should be 100 mm (3.94 in.) or more.
4-3

4.2.3
MELSEC-A
InstalWiTheA2CCPU
This section gives conditionsfor installing the A2C to panel.

Panel wall
/ / / / / / / / / / / I / / / / / /
f$
10 mm (0.39 in.) or more
80 mm (3.15 in. or more / / / / / / / / / / / I / / / / / /
r[
Door
or mm 80 more (3.15 in.)
Fig. 4.8 Installing Position
4-4

4.2.4
MELSEC-A
Installation The AlSCPU This section explains the mounting for main and extension base units.
Indicates the panel top, wiring duct, or any assembly.
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
' 30 mm (1.17 in.) 3
or more
Fig. 4.10 Parallel Mounting

'1 : Depends on the length of the extension cable
as indicated below.
30 mm
or more
1100 mm (43.34 in.) or less for AlSC12B cable 2900 mm (1 14 in.) or less for A1SC3OB cable 350 mm (13.79 in.) or less for A i SC05NB cable *2: 80 mm (3.15 in.) or more if an A55B, A58B, A65, B or A68B extension cable is used.
280 mm (1 1 in.) or less for A1 SC03B cable
'3: 50 mm (1.97 in.) or more if an A55B, A58B, A65B, or A68B extension cable is used.
Fig. 4.11 Serial Mounting
Door
Fig. 4.12 Minimum Front Clearance with Panel Door
Fig. 4.13 Vertical Mounting (Not allowed)
Fig. 4.14 HorizontalMounting (Not allowed)
4-5

4.2.5 Installation the Al, A2 and A3 type CPUs
MELSEC-A
This section explains the mounting for basic and extension base units.
Indicates the panel top, wiring duct, or any assembly. Extension base Main
80 mm (3.15 i n . 7
base
' o r more
For coaxial data link
39 mm (1.54 in.) For &tical data iink
Fig. 4.15 Parallel Mounting

/
'1 : Depends on the length of the extension cable
as indicated below.
450 mm (1 7.72 in.) or less for ACOGB cable 1050 mm (41.34 in.) or less for AClPB cable 2850 mm (1 12.21 in.) or less for AC30B cable '2: 50 mm (1.97 in.) or more when the link unit is not used. 100 mm (3.97 in.) or more when 4.5 mm (0.18 in.) dia. optical fiber cable or coaxial cable is used. 130 mm (5.19 in.) or more when 8.5 mm (0.33 in.) optical fiber cableis used.
Duct (rnax. length 50 rnm (1.97 in.)) Extension base
'3
Fig. 4.16 S ra Mounting ei l
'3: 50 mm (1.97 in.) or more when the link unit is not used. 100 mm (3.94 in.) or more when 4.5 mm (0.18 in.) dia. optical fiber cable or caxial cable is used. 130 mm (5.19 in.) or more when 8.5 mm (0.33 in.) optical fiber cable is used.
Door
Fig. 4.18 Vertical Mounting Fig. 4.17 Minimum Front (Not allowed) Clearance with Panel Door
4-6
Fig. 4.19 Horizontal Mounting (Not allowed)
5. WIRING AND GROUNDING

5.
5.1
MELSEC-A
WRING AND GROUNDING

Wiringto Base Units This sectionexplains the witingof power lines and groundinglines to the main and extension bases.
Main base (A38B)
I \-r
1001110 VAC
Power supply module
CPU
SOINTS~
(1) Supply 24 VDC to the I10
module from either an external power supply or the 24 VDC power supply terminal of an A62P or A65P.
Extension base (AWE)

IIO
I/O
(2) 5 VDC to an A556 or A586 extension base is supplied via an extension cable from the power supply module of a main base unit.
(3) Use the thickest possible
(max. 2mm2 (14 AWG)) wires for the 100 VI200 VAC and 24 VDC power cables. Be sure to twist these wires strting at the connection terminals. To prevent shortcircuit should any screws loosen, use solderless terminals with insulation sleeves.
(4) When the LG terminals and
FG terminals are connected, be sure to ground the wires. Do not connect the LG terminals and FG terminals are connected without grounding the wires, the PC may be susceptible to noise, also since the LG terminals have potential, the operator may get an electric shock when touching metal parts.
Grounding line
1;
I
Extension base (A68B) Power supply module
II O
%$)
VAC
Flig. 5.1 Wiring and grounding
1 -
100 VAC SHORT 200 VAC LG FG
Ground
5-1

5.2
Wiring Instructions Instructions for wiring the power cable or 110 cables.
(1)
MELSEC-A
Wiring of powersource When voltage fluctuations are larger than the specifiedvalue, connect a constant-voltagetransformer. However, use a constant-voltage transformer whose output waveform distortion factor is within 5 %. Use a constant-voltage transformer for an electronic device and select 2 to 3 times the capacity shown in (c).
vlk.ee translornrr
consmi-
PC
1
Fig. 5.2 Constant-vottage transformer
Use a power supply which generates minimal noise across wire and across PC and ground. When excessive noise is generated, connect an insulating transformer.
Fig. 5.2 Constant-vottage transformer
When power transformer or insulating transformer is employed to reduce the voltagefrom 200 VAC to 100 VAC, use one with a capacity greater thanthat indicated in the following table.
AOJPCPU built-in AOJPHCPU built-in AOJPPW A2CCPU built-in A66PC AlS61 P AlS62P
56 VA
120 VA 110 VA 110 VA
I I
A1 CPU built-in A1 NCPU built-in
Use a constant-voltagetransformer that has 2 to 3 times the above capacities taking into consideration the rush current to the power supply module.
5-2
MELSEC-A
(d) When wiring, separate the PC power source from those for I/O equipment and power equipment as shown below.
(e) Twist the 100 VAC, 200 VAC, and 24 VDC cables as closely as possible. Connect modules with the shortest possible wire lengths. (f) To minimize voltage drop, use the thickest (max. 2mm2 (14 AWG)) wires possible for the 100 VAC, 200 VAC, and 24 VDC cables. (9) Do not bundle the 100 VAC and 24 VDC cables with main-circuit wires or the I/O signal wires (high-voltage, large current). Also, do not wire the above indicated cables close the aforementioned to wires. If possible, provide more than 100 mm (3.94in.) distance between the cables and wires. (h) As a measure against verylarge surges (e.g. due to lightening), connect a surge absorber as shown below.
I
j
Fig. 5.5
E~
/-surge
h o b r fcr lightening
Surege absorber f o r lightening
POINTS
(1) Ground the surge absorber (El) and the PC (E2) separately from each other. (2) Select a surge absorber making allowances for power voltage rises.
5-3

(2)
MELSEC-A
Wiring of I/O equipment is (a) Applicable size of wire to the terminal block connector 0.75 (18) to 2 mm2 (14 AWG). However, it is recommended to use wires of 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) for convenience.
(b) Separate the input and output lines.

(c) I/O signal wires must be at least 100 mm (3.94 in.) away from high-voltage and large-current main circuit wires.
Should not be close nor parallel. Twisted in the shortest distance Transformer PC main base unit
DC power ecwpment Extension cable

100 mm or more apart.
r
100 mm or more
1 0 0 mm
Separate or divide the route.
PC extension base Crossing causes no problems.

I
)r more
Input line line Output
Main DUt In. circuit circuit (Fig. 6.5 shows wiring in t h e panel.)
1 c
100 mm or more
Main circuit wiring
circh
Fig. 5.6 Wiring in the panel
Ceiling
Floor
lines
Signal Power lines (a) Ceiling duct wiring
Signal Power lines lines lines (b) Floor duct wiring
Signal Power lines (c) Piping and wiring
Fig. 5.7 External Wiring
5-4
MELSEC-A
(d) When the I/O signal wires cannot be separated from the main circuit wires and power wires, ground on the PC side with batchshielded cables. Under some conditions it may be preferable to ground on the other side.
(e) If wiring has been done with of piping, ground the piping.
(f) Separate the 24 VDC I/O cables from the 100 VAC and 200 VAC cables.
(9) If wirinQ over 200 mm (7.87in.) or lower distance, trouble can be caused by leakage currents due to line capacity.
5-5

5.3 Grounding Effective grounding prevents common mode noise.
(1)
MELSEC-A
The A series PC has good noise resistance. Therefore, the PC may be used without grounding except when there is excessive noise. However, follow (b) to (e) describedbelow. Ground the PC as independently as possible. Class 3 grounding should be used (grounding resistance 100 f2 or less). When independent grounding is impossible, use the joint grounding method as shown in the figure below (2).
(2)
(3)
equipment
equipment
grounding
(a)Independentgrounding
....Best
= Class 3 grounding
(b) Joint grounding
....Good
(c) Joint groundi%....Not allowed
Fig. 5.9 Grounding

(4)
Use 2mm2 (14 AWG) or thicker grounding wire. Grounding point should be as near as possible to the PC to minimize the distance of grounding cable. Should incorrect operation occur due to grounding, disconnect one or both of the LG and FG terminals of base units from the grounding (See Fig.5.10). In the case of not grounding, the LG and FG terminals shoud be disconnected.
(5)
L - _ - ,
Not connected.
(a) Not grounded
(b) LG and FG
(c) LG only
(d) FG only
Fig. 5.10 Grounding Terminals

(6)
When connecting 200 V (ground voltage: 150 V or more) to the PC power supply or I/O circuit, it is necessary to ground the base metal part from the standpoint of safety (Power supply grounding).
If the PC is not grounded, be sure to ground the panel to prevent stray current (Power supply grounding).
(7)
5-6
MELSEC-A
LG ....... Ground terminal of the built-in AC power filter Ground terminal of the noise filter of the 5 V, 24 V power supply of the CPU, FG 110 module, etc. Also connected with a base shielded pattern. SG ....... 5 V power supply ground of a CPU, I/O module, etc.
.......
5-7
6. COUNTERMEASURES AGAINSTNOISE
6.
6.1
MELSEC-A
COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE

Common Mode Noise and Normal Mode Noise
(1)
Common mode noise
Fig. 6.1 Common Mode Noise
An electricpotentialdifference is generatedbynoisebetween the ground, thepower supply, and I/O signal line, and the internal circuit the is disturbed, which causes a malfunction. This is called common mode noise. Charging and discharging of electrical charges arises by the floating capacity between each external signal and the internal circuit, which causes the internal circuit voltage to fluctuate suddenly. This generates common mode noise. Common mode noise is explainedby the following phenomenon: If a glass filled with water is moved rapidly, thewater becomes agitated. This occurs because of the potential difference between the glass and the water. Normal mode noise is equivalent to the agitation of the water in the glass, but is not the difference between the potential of the glass and the potential of the water. Common mode noise generally has greater effect a PC than normal a on mode noise. However, because normal mode noise is line noise, it can be removed by a filter. On the other hand, since common mode noise is related to the floating capacity, it cannot be removed easily. The user can take countermeasures for normal mode noise. However, the user cannot take effective countermeasures for a PC because the manufacturer determines the common mode noise resistance. The strength for a commonmode noise is determined by using the floating capacity Cs. If the PC has a metal case, common mode noise is generally weak. Grounding is an important countermeasure for common mode noise. Common mode noise occurs by noise induced from other lines to the line, high voltage inductive voltage, radio waves, and static electricity.
6. COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE

(2)
MELSEC-A
Normal mode noise Figure 6.2 gives the basic idea of normal mode noise.
4
I
Input
0
Noise source
Power supply
Noise
output
Fig. 6.2 Normal Mode Noise

As shown in the figure, normal mode noise applies to input, output, and power supply lines. Thus, it is sometimes called line noise. Most normal mode noises are caused by the counter electromotive force of an inductive loadconnected to the line. Noise that occurs ina device connected toa power supply system appears in the power supply circuit. Noise that occurs in a device controlled by a PC appears in an output line. Normal mode noise can be prevented doing noise suppression the by in device'where the noise is generated and by installing a filter, a transformer, and a surge suppressor in the PC.
6.2
Power Supply
(1)
Power supply noise When a noise occurs frequently in the load that drives other electric power devices and the PC, one effective countermeasure is to insert a shielded transformer or filter as shown in thefollowing figure. Connect the noiseless power supply line that comes out from the transformer or a filter to the PC using the shortest possible distance. In this case, do not bundle the power supply line with other lines, and make sure they do not intertwine.
100 VAC
Filter
6-2

(2) Power supply connection
MELSEC-A
100 VAC, 200 VAC, and24 VDC power supply lines connected toa PC should be at least 2 mm thick. Connect after twisting them as closely as possible. Ensure that the primarysideand the secondary sidewiring of the transformer, etc. are not parallel; make sure they are at least 100 mm apart.
(3)
Power supply system Separate the PC and I/O device power supplies at the breaker. Mitsubishi recommends separating the wiring routes (See Fig. 5.3).
6.3
Grounding Grounding of the PC ground terminal has the effect of decreasing the noise (common mode noise) between the power supply, I/O lines, and the main body. Section 5.4 gives details.
6.4
PC Panels
(1)
Arrangementofmodules As shown below, PC I/O modules should be arranged next to the CPU as shown below. The basic idea is arrange modulesto keep the CPU as far as possible to from noise sources. Arrange the modules from CPU in the following the order:
0
0
0
Special-function module DCinputmodule Small current DC output module AC inputmodule DCoutputmodule Triac outputmodule Contactoutputmodule
Arrange modules when allocating I/O before programming.

Power supply module Specialfunction module
cpu
DC input module
Small current DC module output module
AC input module
DC output module
Triac output module
Contact output module
Fig. 6.4 Module Arrangement

(2) Panel arrangement
MELSEC-A
Always pay careful attention to the following when determining where to install the PC:
Control panel
I
Power supply
breaker
Auxiliary relay
Main circuit Perts: magnetic contactor, etc.

I
Main circuit breaker
Relay terminal
Fig. 6.5 Panel Anangement

Separate PCsasfaras possible from devicessuchasmagnetic contactors, fuse breakers, etc. that create an arc when switching. Separate the PC as far as possible from high voltage and a high current main circuit cable routes. In addition to countermeasures against noise, the positionmust also be considered from the standpoint of good ventilation, temperature consistency, minimal vibration and shock, and ease of PC operationand maintenance.
(3)
Panel wiring See Section 5 .
6-4

6.5
External I/O Signal Wire
MELSEC-A
ra a
PC
Make every effort to keep the I/O signal wireseparate from the main circuit high-voltage, large current cables. If separation cannot be done, perform grounding on the PC side by using a batch shielded cable(See Fig. 5.8). If external wiring is 200 m or more, or in the case of an AC input signal with a large inductive voltage, use a shielded line at each point, or take appropriate countermeasures as shown in the following figure. In the case of long-distance wiring (hundreds of meters), PC input and output lines should beseparated.
DC (1) Input power supply current direct
-I.+
+ -
input
AC
Common
Common AC RA: Auxiliary relay
Z: Dummy resistance or
CR surge suppressor
(2) Dummy resistance or CR surge suppressor is connected.
(3) Relay circuit
Fig. 6.6 Countermeasures Against Input lnductive Voltage

(1)
Input device
1)
a PC,connect a CR surge suppressor parallel to a load for the AC input as shown below. Connect a fly wheel diode parallel to the DC input load. Connect a surge suppressor as close as possible to the inductive load. If the input device incorporates an operation display neon lamp, or if a limit switch is used as input, voltage is sometimes created by the neon lamp current even when the limit switch contact is open. If this voltage is large, take countermeasures against inductive voltage, as shown in Fig. 6.6 below.
PC
PC
If the inductive load is connected parallel to the input module of
2)
ICR: Surge suppressor D:

(1) AC input
Fly wheel diode

(2) DC input
Fig. 6.7 When Inductive Load is Parallel with Input
6-5

(2)
MELSEC-A
Output device In the case of inductive loads, noise is created by rush currentwhen an output signal goes ON. In addition, when an output signal turned OFF, is noise is created by a counter electromotive force. Arc noise is also created from contacts such as magnetic contactors, etc. If sufficient noise countermeasures have been taken on thePC side, it is not necessary to take special countermeasures. Take the following countermeasures when improving noise intensity reducing influences or on other electronic devices:
1) In the case of AC inductive load, connect CR surge suppressors to both ends of the load. Use a CR surge suppressor of 0.5 pF + 47 for 100 VAC, 200 VAC, and 400 VA. If this CR surge supto pressor is not connected to the position closest the load, it will have no effect (See Fig. 6.8). 2)
In the case of DC inductive load, connect fly wheel diodes to both ends of the load. Connect these diodes closest to the load. The opposite withstanding diode voltage must be at least four times that of the load voltage (See Fig. 6.9). When a fly wheel diodeis connected to a DC inductive load, the load operation is delayed by the current flowing in the diode during breaking. If this delay causes a problem, connect aCR surge suppressor, in addition to taking the abovementioned countermeasures against AC inductive load noise.
PC
Fig. 6.8 CountermeasuresAgainst AC Induction Load Noise

PC
r-.-----output
1
I I
0
I
,I ,
DC
L L - - - - - - J Place D close to load.
Fig. 6.9 CountermeasuresAgainst DC Inductive Load Noise
6-6
6. COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE _ _

, .
,
MELSEC-A
3) When the load to be connected to a PC output is opened and
shut at the external contact, be sure to take the same countermeasures in Figs. 6.8 and 6.9, regardless of the presence or absence of noise countermeasures on the PC side (See Fig. 6.10).
PC
,\
LS (external contact)
A W
AC
(1) In the case of AC
; 1 .. . 1 1 PC
LS (external contact)
(2) In the case of DC
4) Switching by using a triac that breaks when the load current is
zero is effective for an AC inductive load with significant noise during breaking.
5) Connecting CR surge suppressors to both ends of the contact is effective as a countermeasures against arc noise during contact switching of magnetic contactors. Be alert for leakage current by the CR surge suppressor circuit even when the contact is open (See (A) in Fig. 6.11).
6) If the break noise of the motor and transformer create problems,
connect a CR surge suppressor between the phases (See (B) in Fig. 6.11).
7) The relay in the panel has also an effect (See Fig. 6.12). The basic idea behind the anti-noise countermeasuresof a solenoidal device is to repress the noise-generating source. Items 1) to 6 ) above corresponds to this. Take the countermeasures given above for a PC output with a large noise occurrence. When connecting a device with weak noise, select the output module of a PC with a surge suppressor. Use the contact output module without a surge suppressor only for an electronic timer, motor-driven timer, miniature relay, or alamp.
Countermeasures against arc noise (A)
-OF4/
7d - -
C[ R
+22c;
R
c:
\
Countermeasures against noise break
PC output-
(e)
Fig. 6.11 CountermeasuresAgainst Large-Capacity Load Noise
MELSEC-A
AC
AC
Fig. 6.12 Load Driving by Using Rdays
6-8
6. COUNTERMEASURES AGAINSTNOISE
6.6
Troubleshooting and Noise Countermeasures
MELSEC-A
When one of the following control errors occur, external noise considered is to be the cause. When an error occurs which synchronizes with the operationof a specific output device controlled by the PC Inthis case, noise or a surge from theoutputdeviceareusually considered to be the cause. When a device is turned ON and OFF, an error may occur, stopping the PC. Take the anti-noisecountermeasuresexplainedunder"Output device" earlier in this section. The countermeasures given in Figs. 6.8 and 6.9 are normally effective. If a surge suppressor and a diode are not installed in the position closest to the load,it will have no effect. In the case of a mass load, take the countermeasures given inFig. 6.1 1. Faulty connections, such as a slack input line, disconnections, faulty ground contacts, mixed contacts and input devices,etc. are considered as causes of problems that occur which synchronize withthe operation of other devices. Therefore, check them very carefully. When an error occurs which synchronizes with the operationof other devices that do not relate to the PC In such cases, the cause is noise or surge from another device. Take the same countermeasures as those for (1) above for the corresponding device. If these countermeasures do not solve the problem, ground devices any which are not grounded. When they are grounded,tryungrounding them. Separate I/O signallinesfromthewiring of acorrespondent device. Or, change the route. When an error occurs when a large-capacity load is turned ON Power supply voltage drop and the rise of the ground electric potential of a shared groundare considered as causes. When the power supply voltage drops below the specified valuewhen it is turned ON, change the power supply system by installing a low voltage transformer in the power supply. When grounded, try ungrounding. When the operation of the PC is randomly unsteady Although most causes for such PC problems are given in above, other factors could includethe following:
1)
(1) to (3)
Frequent momentary power supply failures. Or particularly bad waveforms. In such cases install a constant-voltage transformer,or change the power supply system. Also, using only an insulation transformer can be effective. Grounding high-frequency equipment and the PC panel. The I/O signal line of a PC should be shielded.
2) When there is a great deal of voltage noise
3) Influence of high-frequency equipment
6-9

(5) When an inductive voltage of the input is large
MELSEC-A
In thiscase, the PC does not stop and an output error occurs causeby erroneous input. Even if the inductive voltage is low, a wrong input occurs by noise. In thiscase, take the countermeasures given Fig. 6.6. in Take the above countermeasures against PC noise problems. When making a panel, or when constructing external wiring, costs be reduced by taking can these countermeasures. When setting a system using a PC, it is importantto consider which countermeasure should be taken. It is also necessary to check whether the countermeasures taken when the problem occurred were really effective by removing the countermeasures in order to reproduce the problem.
6- 10
7. TEST OPERATION AND ADJUSTING

7.
7.1
MELSEC-A
TEST OPERATIONANDADJUSTING
Check Points Before Start of Test Operation This section expains the points to be checed prior to the test operation of programmable controller.
-1
Loading and setting of memory cassette
Tabel 7.1 C
1) Check that the Check that the 2) Check that the 3) Check that the
WPit ons
Doecription
memory cassette is securely inserted into the CPU module. memory casaette clicks when loaded. used memory capacity matches the capacity of the memory cassette. RAMlROM setting is correct. 4) Check that the RAM or ROM is loaded securely. 5) Check that the memory protect is ON. before shipment, is securely inserted in the pin connector on the printed circuit board. (The red lead is positive and the blue lead negative.) 2) Check that the voltage of battery has not reduced. (Nominal value: 3 6 V) . with the connectors of extension cable. 2) Check that the connector msition of extension base is correct.
1 ) Check whether the connector for battery lead wires, which has been disconnected
Loading of battery (inside the memory cassette) Connection of Extension stage number setting of extension base
1 ) Check that the connectors of main base and extension base are properly o n m c t d c
1 ) Check that setting has been performed. 2) Check that the same number has been set. 3) Check whether one base has been set at more than one dace.
Loading of modules
correct. 2) Check that the setting of the point setting switch of dummy unit (AG62) is proper. 3) Check whether the module configuration uses more 110 points more than the I/O points of CPU specificaions.
~ ~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~
1) Check that the types of unit loaded in each slot of main base and extension baseis
Fuse Connection of power and I/O cables
1) Check if the fuse has blown or been damaged. 1) Check the cables connected to each terminal of the terminal block. 2) Check the terminal screws of terminal block for the power supply module and terminal block for 110 module. 3) Check the cable size.
7-1
7. TEST OPERATION AND ADJUSTING

7.2
MELSEC-A
TestOperationandAdjustingProcedure This section shows the flow chart from after the completion of installation to the test operation of programmable controller.
I
Power-on
Start
1. Check the input linevoltage. 2. Check the line voltage for I/O equipment. 3. Move RUN key switch onCPU module to the 'STOP' position. 4. Turn on Me power. 5. Check that 'POWER' LED on power supply module turns on.
operation. Check sequence
-t
I
Test operation
1. Move the RUN key switch the CPU unit to on the RUN position. 2. Check that 'RUN' LED is lit.
Sequence chek
Write the sequence program, which has been written in the perpheral device, to the PC, or use the PU programming by use of the PU.
Program correction
1
L
1
Checking of external output wiring Chek the external output wiring using the forced out put function in the 'TEST' mode of the GPP or the PU.
Make corrections if the sequence program has errors.
(
>
Program protection
1. Write the program to EP-ROM or floppy disk. 2. Print the ladder diagram and list usingthe printer.
Checking of external input equipment wiring Chek the external output wiring using the forced out put function in the 'TEST' mode of the GPP or the PU.
7-2
8. MAINTENANCE
8.
8.1
MELSEC-A
MAINTENANCE
Malfunction Analysis The PC is designed so that if a malfunction occursin any of its modules, that module will be replaced,not repaired. The pie charts below show the results of a questionnaire prepared by NECA (Nippon Electric Controller Association). They show the malfunction location, malfunction cause, and malfunction stop time percentageswhen problems occur with a PC.
Fig. 8.1 Malfunction Location Pewntages
Fig. 8.2 Malfunction Cause Percentages
Fig. 8.3 Malfunction Stop Time Percentages
8-1
8. MAINTENANCE
8.2
Maintenance To ensure the PC isin the best operating condition, perform checks daily or periodically:
(1)
MELSEC-A
the following
Daily inspection Table 8.1 shown the inspection items which are to be checked daily.
Table 8.1 D iy Inspection al

Check Item Point Check
Judgemnt
Comctive Action
Base unit mounting conditions Mounting conditions of I10 module, etc.
Check loose mounting screws and cover. Check i f the module is desengaged or the hook is securely engaged. Check for loose terminal scmws.
The base unit should be securely mounted. The hook shoud be
Retighten screws.
positively mounted.
Securely engage thehook. the $ ~ ~ ~ f ~ ~ Retighten terminal screws. Correct. Retighten connector mounting screws. Power supply and voltage check Fuse check Power supply module installation Varies according to the type of CPU. See the corresponding manual.
Screws should not be loose. Proper clearance should be provided between solderless terminals. Connections should not be loose. On. (Off indicates an error.)
Connecting conditions
Check distance between solderless terminals. Check connectors of extension cable.
'POWER' LED
Check that the LED is on.
CPU module ndicator lamps
'RUN' LED
Check that the LED is on during run. Check that the LED turns on and off.
On. (Off or flicker indicates an error.) On when input is on. Off when input is off. (Display, which is not as mentioned above, indicates an error.) when output is off. (Display, which is not as mentioned above. indicates an error:)
Input LED
Output LED
Check that the LED turns on and off.
I On when outDut is on. oft

I
a-2
8. MAlNTEl ANCE
(2)
MELSEC-A
Periodic inspection This section explains the inspection items which are to be checked every six months to one year. If the equipment have been moved or modified or wiring has beenchanged, also make the inspection.
Table 8.2 perbdic Inspection

~~ ~
Chock Item
I
Check Point Judgement

I
I
COtI'OdW A o t k n
Amvient
Ambient temperature
Ambience
Measure with thermometer and hygrometer. Measure corrosive gas.
0 to 55 to 10
o c
90 %RH
When PC is used inside a panel, the temperature in the panel is ambient temperature.
Looseness, play Mounting conditions Ingress of dust or foreign material Loose terminal screws Connecting conditions solderless Distances between solderless terminals. Loose connector
Move the unit.
The module should be mounted securely and all positively. There should be no dust or foreign material, in the vicinity of the PC. Connectores should not Proper clearance should be provided between
Retighten For CPU, 1 0 and power 1, supply modules check conmctions Remove and clean.
Visual check.
Retighten.
Visual check.
Correct.
nals.
Visual check.
Check battery status by monitoring special auxiliary relays M9006 and M9007. Replace battery if necessary. fuses. Check
be loose. Connectors should not
Battery
If battery capacity reduction is not indicated, Preventive maintenance change the battery when lifeservice specified is exceeded. Preventive maintenance Chenge the fuse periodically due to rush current.
Retighten connector mountina screws.
Fuse
a-3
8. MAINTENANCE
8.3 Expendable Items
MELSEC-A
The expendable items in a PC are the output relays, backup batteries, and fuses. When an error occurs in the CPU, an I/O module, or power supply module, that module must be replaced. Batteries and fuses are explained in the following section. 8.4 Output Relay Lifetimes A contact output module's relay is used up by the makelbreak switching operation. When a relay directly attached to the printed circuit board an output module of is used up, the output module must be replaced.
200
100
70
50
30
20
Switching lifetime 7 (x 10,000)

5
10
0.5
0.7
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
Load current (A)
Fig. 8.4 Output Relay Contact Lifetime Characteristics
a-4
8. MAINTENANCE
85
MELSEC-A
Replacement Parts In Japan, since replacement partscan be easily obtainedfromservice centers, branch offices, agents, etc., they canbepurchasedasneeded. However, when a PC is used overseas, replacement parts must be ordered beforehand. Pay attention to the following design points. Doing so makes maintenance easier. Quickly restored types
With building block types, module replacement is easy. Only malfunctioning modules need to be replaced.
Types of memory IC-RAM memory and latch relay need battery backup. Since EP-ROM (EEP-ROM) can avoid program changes due to mistakes because batteries are not needed, they are suitable for export. Reduction of module categories Desirable for reducing replacement parts categories. Ensuring replacement contacts
If there are no module replacement parts, the spare number of points can be secured by changing the connection and program (I/O signal and change) by not utilizing 10 to 20 % of the16-point,32-point, 64-point I/O modules.
Document creation Since it is easy to change programs with a PC, operating programsand documents (ladder diagrams, program lists, etc.) may not always correspond. Always prepare the most recent document. A printer is useful for doing so. Proficiency in handling peripheral devices Proficiency in handling equipment such as a GPP, HGP, PHP, PU, a printer, etc. can shorten the recovery time when an accident occurs.
8-5
8. MAINTENANCE
(7) Replacement parts
MELSEC-A
L
Batteries Fuses
~~~
~~~~~
specifications.
The storage lifetime of a lithium batteryis about 5 years. However, prepare 1 or 2 batteries for unforeseen contingencies. Section 9.1 gives details about
Number needed
The AC battery and the output module each have one fuse attached. A fuse can be Mown by rush current for many reasons; short circuits, excess current during power ONIOFF, etc. Therefore, ahvays make sure to have enough fuses on hand. Section 9.2 gives details about specifications.
Backup floppy disk of the sothvare package used for start-up and replacements for the user's floppy disks. Remember that malfunctions easily occur during test operations. After extended use, the contacts of relay output moduleswear out. Since this is the main part of a PC, if it malfunctions, the system will go down. Same as above. Since the parts can attain very high temperatures,if the ambient temperature becomes too high, it could shorten the unit's lifetime. PUSare useful asGPP,HGP, and
disks
I'O module
As necessary
One per type One per type
CPU module
Power supply module

Peripheral devices
One per type As necessary
PHP replacements.
8.6
Program Storage
Think of a program as you would replacement parts, and store it by using a peripheral device. EP-ROM memory Data is stored to the ROM by using a GPP or a ROM writer unit. ROM operation of a CPU can be donein case of an emergency. Since EP-ROMs are compact with excellent storage capacity, they are convenient to use.
FD
Programs are stored to the user disk by using a GPP, HGP, or PHP. 96 programs max. can be stored in a disk. An FD's capacity is larger than that of a cassette tape, and it takes less timefor reading and writing. Cassette tape
a PU Programs are recorded by tape recorder using either a or cassette interface module. Reading and writing take longer than with an FD and the reliability is slightly inferior.
Hard copy Programs are printed out by using a printer or ladder creation equipment, and the printout is then stored.
8-6
9. BAlTERlES AND FUSES

9.
9.1
MELSEC-A
BAlTERlES AND FUSES

Battery Lifetimes
(1)
Replacement of battery
M9006 or M9007 turns on when the voltage of battery for program backup and power failure compensation reduces. Even if this special relay turns on, the contents of the program and power failure compensation are not lost immediately. However, if the ON state is overlmked, the PC contents may be lost. As a preventativemaintenance measure, Mitsubishi recommends early replacements of batteries and fuses. This section explains standards, battery lifetimes, and gives replacement details.
Battery modelname
AGBAT
9-1

(2) Servicelife of battery
MELSEC-A
This service lifeof the battery depends on the capacityof the memory. table 9.1 shows service life according to memory.
Table 9.1 Battery Lifetimes
1
A2 type CPUs
A3 type CPUs
A3MCA-O ABNMCA-0 A3MCA-2 A3NMCA-2 A3MCA-4 A3NMCA-4 A3MCA-8 A3NMCA-8 A3MCA-12 A3NMCA-16 A3MCA-18 A3NMCA-24 A3NMCA-40 A3NMCA-56 A3AMCA-96
1
1
10800 7200 5400 3600 2150 1950
I
I
27000 18000 13000 9000 5400 4900 3500 1125 9495 1400 450 1860 7200
1
A2C. AOJ2H.
1
I
I
I
AOJ2, A1 type CPUs
18000 13000
AlSCPU
5400
'The actually applied value indicates a typical value and the guaranteed value indicates the minimum value.
Preventive maintenance is as described below. 1) Even if the total power failure time is less than the guaranteed value in the above table, change the battery after four to five years.
2) When the total power failure time has exceeded the guaranteed value in the above table and M9600 has turned on, change the battery. When a power failure occurs, the battery lifetime lastsabout one week (168 Hr.) after M9006 goes ON.
(3) Replacement
Although the times between connecting a new battery after disconnection an old battery vary according to the type of memory cassette, all replacements must be done within 3 minutes.
9-2

9.2
MELSEC-A
Table 9.2 List of Fwws
Fuses
Purpora8
For power supply A1 type CPUs A61P. 62P
GTH4
4A
Glass tube
Luilding
Mock
Output module
Fuses for t h e power supply of an AOJ2, AOJPH, A2C, AlSCPU and thefuse for an A1S output module cannot be interchanged.
(Note)
AOJ2
Triac output module
AOJZ-E[]S
HP-32
3.2A
Plug
30.3
8 X 20
Daito
9-3
MEMO
10. POWER SUPPLY MODULE SELECTION

MELSEC-A
Select the power supply module in accordance withthe total current consumption of each input/output, and the special-function module and a peripheral devicefor 5 VDC to be supplied by the power supply module. When an extension base which does not a power supply is used, it is necessary to take into account that it's power must be supplied by the power supply module of the main base unit. The wiring supply from the 24 VDC output of a power supply module for each input/output and special-function module which require 24 VDC can be used.
10- 1

10.1 Selecting an Extension Power Supply Module for an AOJ2 or AOJPH CPU
(1)
MELSEC-A
5 VDC currentconsumption of eachmodule The output current capacity 5 VDC current consumption and all power supply modules are given below. Calculate whether an extension power supply module is necessary by using the following chart.
5 VDC current consumption of an AOJ2 or AOJ2H module (A)
Output current of a power supply module b
AOJ2, AOJ2H CPU built-in
CPU Types
For Single
For Optical Link
For Coaxial Link
5 VDC2A 24 VDC 0.5A
SVDC 2 A 24 VDC 0.5 A
AOJ2-DC24 AOJ2H-DC24 CPU built-in
1
~
1 VDCA 5 2.5
AOJ2PW-DC24 AOJ2HPW-DC24
I
1
10 Modules 1
AOJ2-E28AR 0.14 AOJ2C25 5VDC2 A 24VDC 0.5 A AOJ2-E28AS 0.26 AOJ2-E28DR 0.13 AOJ2-E28DS 0.26 AOJ2-E28DT 0.125 AOJ2E-E28DR 0.13 AOJ2E-E28DS 0.23 AOJ2E-E28DT 0.25
10-2
MELSEC-A
When the power is supplied from the AOJ2HCPU (P21/R21)s built-in power supply, the total internal current consumption of the entire system should be within AOJ2HCPUs built in power supply capacity range.
CPUs built-in power supply capacity: 5 VDC, 2A
If the total consumption exceeds the CPUs built-in power supply capacity range, use the extension power supply unit (AOJ2PW). For the I/O units which is supplied with 5 VDC power by the extension unit, set the I/O units internal power supply select switch to EX5V.
POINT I The allowable current capacity of the 5 VDC power supply which can be supplied from the extension power supply unit to the I/O units and extension base unit is 2.3 A. If it exceeds 2.3 A, use the extension base unit A65B. (2)Receiving endvoltage of eachmodule
Since the5 VDC power is supplied to the I/O units and extension base unitthroughthe I/O cables andextension cables, respectively, the voltage may drop at the cables. Therefore, specified voltage (4.75 VDC or more) may not be supplied at the receiving end, causing input/output errors. Calculate the voltage requirement as described below and determine whether or not the AOJ2PW is to be used.
1) 5 VDC power requirement
i) 5 VDC output voltage range of the power supply unit is 4.9 to 5.2 VDC. ii) The specified voltageat the I/Ounit or the extension base unit is 4.75 VDC or more.
2) Cable resistances
AOJ2COl AOJ2C03 AOJ2C06
0.047 R
0.0617 R
0.0882 R
Refer to 5.2 for cable resistances. Due to the above requirements 1) and 2), it is necessary to satisfy the specified voltage (4.75 VDC or more) of the system at the receiving end when the 5 VDC output of the power supply unit is a minimum of 4.9 VDC. Voltage calculation at the receiving end is as described on the next page.
10-3
5 v current consumption of CPU
current 5 V current consumption of siconsumption of peripheral multaneously ON 10 modules (A7PU) 1 device

+
outputs
I
L

How to calculate receiving end voltage
Vl
MELSEC-A
CPU unit
1 0 unit 1 number
u
(0)
I/O unit number
VI : Voltage drop at the c b between CPU unit and 10 unit (0) ak 1 V2 : Voltage drop at the cable between 110 unit (0) and I10 unit (1) Rt : Resistance of the cable k m CPU unit and 10 unit (0) 1 R2 : Rrsistence of the cabb k on 110 unit (0) and 10 unit (1 ) t e w 1 I 1 : Current consumption of the 5 VDC power in I/O unit (0) 12 : Current consumption of the 5 VDC power in I/O unit (1)
I
I/O unit
(1)
Fig. 10.1 System Configurationand Symbols Used The voltage drops VI and V 2 are, VI = RI (11 + 12)
V2
+ R211
The voltage at the receiving end of I/O unit (1) is, Receiving end voltage = 4.9 - (VI + V2) > 4.75 To satisfy the requirement that the receivingend voltage must be 4.75 VDC or more, 4.9 4.75 > v 1 + v 2 0.15 > RI (I1 + 12) + R212 If the condition is met, extension is allowed up to the I/O unit (1).
Therefore, the number of I/O units to be extended or use of the extension base unit (A55B) can be determined when the following condition is met: 0.1 5( = 4.9 - 4.75) > sum of the voltage drops up to the receiving end.
10-4
~*
MELSEC-A
(3) 5 VDC power voltage drop calculation example using AOJ2 cables.
Syrtwn Configuration Using CPU's Built-in Power Supply Only 112 I10 points Example 1 110.552A 60% ON Using Extension Power Supply 240 110 points 60% ON
/ I AOJ2CO6 ;
(2 pieces)
AOJ2COl AOJ2C06 AOJ2COl pieces) (2
!---------- 110.2764 120.516A 130.516A 140.24A
(1 piece) (1 piece)
Example 2
E24S (0) E56AS (1)
E24S (2) E56AS (3)
E24S (4) E56AS (5)
Mounting Extension Power Supply unit on 110 unit at Final End
Example 3(5)
(4)
CPU E56AS E56AS E56AS E56AS E56AS E56AS (2) ( 0 ) (1)
PW
g A O J 2 C 0 6 AOJ2CO1
:--------::-----:110.276A
: TT g:
I
Ir l I1 I
I I
I
I
I *I1 I
I 1 I l l
I l l
;-+,
I
I
.552A I
.A -
0.276A
PW
L-L-Jd
CPU ~ 5 6 E56AS E56AS E56AS ~ sE56AS E56AS (0) (1) (2) (3)
L----J
(4)
(5)
Using Extension Base Unit

440 1 0 points 1
r--------
AOJ2C06
AOJ2ClOB AOJ2COl
4 I/O units are used.
Example 4
I
I I I 1 1 I I I I
PW
CPU E56AS E56AS E56AS E56AS

(0)
(1)
A55B base unit

(2) (3)
10-5
MELSEC-A
Judgment
:PU 5 V position
41
= AOJ206 Resistance x (I1 + = 0.0882 X (0.552 + 0.276) = 0.073 (V)
12)
0.15 V or less
0
VI= AOJ2COl Resistance x (I1 + = 0.047 X (0.276 + 0.516)

= 0.037 (V)
12)
0
V2 = AOJ2C06 Resistance x 13 + AOJ2CO1 Resistance X
:PU 5 V position: I/O unit 0.1
= 0.0882
X 0.516 = 0.057 (V)
+ 0.047 X
0.24
14
:X 5 V position: 10 units 2,3,4 $ 5 1
= AOJ2COl Resistance x 14 + AOJ2C06 Resistance x (11+12+13) = 0.047 X 1 .lo4 + 0.0882 X (0.276 + 0.552 + 0.828) = 0.198 (V) When the extension power supply unit is used at the final end, voltage drop at the final end unit supplied with power is large and the requirement of 0.15 V or less is not satisfied. Therefore, take the following remedy.
V1
1.15 V or more X
CPU 5 V position: I/O units 0.
EX 5 V position: 1 0 units 2,3.+ I 1
VI = AOJ2COl Resistance x 13 + AOJ2CO6 Resistance X (11 + = 0.047 X 0.828 + 0.0882 X (0.276 + 0.552) = 0.112 (V) V2 = AOJ2C06 Resistance x 14 = 0.0882 X 0.276 = 0.024 (V)
12)
V1 = AOJ2C06 Resistance x I1 + AOJ2CO1 Resistance X = 0.0882 X 0.276 + 0.047 X 0.552 = 0.0503 (V) Vp = AOJ2ClOB Resistance x 13 = 0.126 X 0.492 = 0.062 (V)
12
CPU 5 V position: 110 units 0.1
EX 5 V position: 1 0 units 2,3 1
Unit-to-unit mounting
10-6
10. POWER SUPPLY MODULESELECTION
MELSEC-A
1) I/O unit numbers are indicated in parentheses. I/O unit current consumption has been calculated, assuming that the simultaneous ON ratio is maximum of 60 %. 2) In Examples 2, 3, and 4, the units supplied with 5 VDC power from the extension power supply unit are indicated by the full line. The units supplied with the power by the CPUs built-in power supply are shown by the dotted line.
3) Indicated above are voltage drops occurring between the power supply unit and the I/O unit at the final end.
POINTS I
(1) As shown in Examples 3 and 4, the voltage drop of the I/O unit are
the final end varies depending on the location of the extension power supply module and the connection of the cable. Therefore, select the I/O or extension cable or select I/O unit so that the voltage drop may be 0.15 V in the system.
(2) Avoid using the extension power supply unit at the final end because the voltage drop value is larger. (4) 24 VDC current consumption of each module
The 24 VDC output current capacity of power supply modules and the 24 VDC current consumption of all modules are shown below. If there is a shortage in the following values, use an extension power supply module or an external DC stabilized power supply.
Output current of a power supply module
I/O Modules and Special-Function

Modules tion (A) Relay contact output
CPU built-in 5 V D C2 A 24 VDC 0.5 A AOJ2PW 24VDC0.5A AOJ2-DC24 AOJ2H-DC24 BVDC 2 A AOJ2PW-DC24 AOJ2HPW-DC24
-AOJ2-E24R
~ : $ : ~ g ~ $ ~Relay contact output

I Relay contact output I I D-A conversion I
I 2-axis Dositionim I
0.23
0.125
AOJ2-ES6DR
0.22
0.23
I AOJ2-D71
AOJ2-62DA
0.05
5 VDC 2 A
10-7

142 Selection of a Power Supply Module for an A1S
(1)
MELSEC-A
5 VDC currentconsumption of all modules The output current capacity of power supply modules and the 5 VDC current consumption of all modules are shown below. Select the power supply module by using the following chart.
5 VDC current consumption of an A1S module (A)

Output currentof a power supply module AlSCPU(S1) 5VDC 5 A Peripheral Devices A7PU A7PUS Input Modules AGGPP AlSX10 AlSX20 A1SX30 A1SX40 5VDC 5 A AlSX40-S1 AlSX4042 A1SX41 AlSX4142 AlSX42 AlSX4242
0.08
0.4
5 VDC 3 A
1-1
0.05
AGHGP
con-
sumed*
I
I AlSY10
10.12
0.09
AlSH42
sxB_I
A1 SX8O-S2 A1SX81-S2 A1S64AD AlS62DA AlS62RD3 AlS62RD4
0.08
I AlSY6OE 1 AlSY68A
l p q I
A1SY42 A1SY60 0.93 0.12
I 0.20 I 10.13 1
Special-Function Modules
I AlSJ71T21B
AlSJ71C24-R2/R4/PRF A1 SP60
A-D conversion D-A conversion Temperature-digital conversion
I Data link
link
I
1 :::: 1
0.8
0.1 Computer
I
~
Pulse catch Analog timer interrupt
I AlSTGO
AlS161
0.055
0.057
10-8

(2)
MELSEC-A
Application standards of extension base unit (AlS52B, AlS55B, A l S S B , A558, A58B) With the AlS52B, AlS558, AlS58B, A55B, or A58B extension base unit, 5 VDC is supplied from the power supply module of the main base unit via extension cable. Therefore, some voltage drop occurs over the extension cable and the specified voltage is not supplied to the receiving end , resulting in mis-input and mis-output. If the voltage at the receiving end is less than 4.75 V, use an extension base unit of models AlS65B, AlS68B, A65B, or A68B equipped with a power supply unit. (a) Selection conditions
,
The voltage received by the module installed in the last slot of an extensionbaseunit A1 S52B, AlS55B,AlS588, A55B, or A588 must be 4.75 V or above. Since the output voltage of the power supply module is set at 5.1 V or above, the voltage drop must be 0.35 V or less. Classificationof voltage drop
(3)
Voltage drop is classified into (a), (b), and (c) as follows according to the connecting method and type of extension base units. (a) Voltage drop of a main base unit (b) Voltage drop of an extension base unit (c) Voltage drop over an extension cable
Extension cable connected to the left side of main base unit (serial) Extension cable connected to t h e right side of main base unit (carallel\
AlSS2B,'AlSSSB. or AlS58B extension base unit is used
r l
*lS3[lB
Voltage drop of the main base unit can be ignored.
A1S3[ ]B
I I I
A55B or A58B extension base unit is used
Voltage drop of t h e main and the extension base unitscan be ignored.
Voltage drop of the extension base units canbe anored.
10-9

(4)
MELSEC-A
Calculation of the receiving-endvoltage Voltage drop of a main base unit (AlS32B, A1 S35B, AlS38B) Each slot of a main base unit has a resistance of 0.007 R. Calculate voltage drop of each slot, and obtain the total voltage drop of a base unit.
1) Voltage drop of a CPU module: V CPU
V CPU = 0.007 x (current consumption of the CPU module: 0.4) = 0.0028 (V)
2) Voltage drop of slot 0: V KO
V KO = 0.014 x (current consumption of the module in slot 0: I KO) V K1 = 0.021 x (current consumption of the module in slot 1: I K1)
3) Voltage drop of slot 1: V K1
4 ) Voltage drop of slot 2: V K2

V K2 = 0.028 x (current consumption of the module in slot 2:
I K2)
Voltage drop of slot 3: V K3

V K = 0.035 x (current consumption of the module in slot 3: 3 I K3)
Voltage drop of slot 4: V K4 V K = 0.042 x (current consumption of the module in slot 4: 4 I K4) Voltage drop of slot 5 : V K5
V K = 0.049 x (current consumption of the module in slot 5 : 5 I K5)


VK=VCPU+VKO+VKl+VK2+VK3+VK4+VK5+V K6 + V K7
10) Voltage drop of a base unit: V K
Voltage drop of an extension base unit (A1 S52B, A1 S55B, A1 S58B) Each slot of an extension base unit has a resistance of 0.006 R. Calculate voltage drop of each slot, and obtain the voltage drop total of a base unit.
10 - 10
I O . POWER SUPPLY MODULE SELECTION

1) Voltage drop of slot 0: V 20
MELSEC-A
V Z = 0.006 x (current consumption of the module in slot 0: O I 20)

V 21 = 0.01 2x (current consumptionof the module in slot 1:
2 ) Voltage drop of slot 1: V 21
3) Voltage drop of slot 2: V 22 V 22 = 0.018 x (current consumption of the module in slot 2: I 22) 4) Voltage drop of slot 3: V 23 V 23 = 0.024 x (current consumptionof the module in slot 3: I 23) 5) Voltage drop of slot 4: V 24
V 24 = 0.030 x (current consumptionof the module in slot 4: I 24)
6) Voltage drop of slot 5 : V 25
V 25 = 0.036 x (current consumption of the module in slot 5: I 25) 7) Voltage drop of slot 6: V 26 V 26 = 0.042 x (current consumption of the module in slot 6: I 26)
8) Voltage drop of slot 6: V 27
V 27 = 0.048 x (current consumption of the module in slot 7: I 27)

9) Voltage drop of an extension base unit: V 2
VZ= VZO+VZl+V22+V23+VZ4+V25+VZ6+V27 (c) Vottage drop over extension cables 1) Total current consumption of an extension base unit: I Z
I Z = IZO+IZ1+122+123+124+125+IZ6+127
2) Voltage drop over an extension cable: V C

V C = (Resistance of an extension cable) x I Z
Resistance of an extension cable

: 0.02 R : 0.021 R : 0.055 R : 0.121 R A1 SC05NB : 0.037 C2
AlSCOlB AlSC03B A1SC12B AlSC30B

(d) Voltage at the receiving end
MELSEC-A
- VK - VZ - VC) 2 4.75 (V) - Example - - - - - - - - (5.1 (V)
I I
I I
A1S38B
hhacaaaaaa
r r r r r c r r
AlSOIB (0.021 f) 2 AlS58B
I I
1) Voltage drop of a main base unit
(5)
I I I Voltage I L
VK=0.007~0.4+(0.014~0.05+0.021 ~0.05+0.028~0.05+0.035( X 0.05 + 0.042 X 0.05 + 0.049 X 0.05 + 0.056 X 0.05 + 0.063 X 0.05) = 0.01 82 (V)
2) Voltage drop of an extension base unit V

= 0.05832 (V)
Z = 0.006 X 0.27 + (0.012 X 0.27 + 0.018 X 0.27 + 0.024 X 0.271 + 0.030 x 0.27 + 0.036 x 0.27 + 0.042 x 0.27 + 0.048 x 0.27)
3) Voltage drop over an extension cable VC = 0.021 X (0.27 4)

X
8 ) = 0.04536 (V)
24 VDC current consumption of all modules
- - - - - - - - - - - I
5.1 - 0.0182 - 0.05832 - 0.04536 f 4.978 (V) Since the voltageat the receiving end is more than 4.75 V, the1 above system can be put into operation.
at the receiving end
I I I
The 24 VDC output current consumption of power supply modules and the 24 VDC current consumption of all modules are shown below. If there isa shortage in the following values, use an external stabilized DC power supply.
I AlS61P
15VDC 5 A
Output Modules
AlSY10
Current Consumption (A)
Relay contact output
0.09
1 AlS62P
5 VDC 3 A 24 VDC 0.6 A
10 - 12
10. POWER SUPPLY MODULE SELECTION ., . ".,

. _ I
MELSEC-A
10.3 Selection of an Extension Power Supply Module for an A2CCPU

(1) 5 VDC current consumption of all modules 5 VDC is supplied bythe 24 VDC power supply of eachmodule. Therefore, it is unrelated to the selection of power supply modules. (2) 24 VDC current consumption of all modules The 24 VDC output current capacity of power supply modules and the 24 VDC current consumption of all modules are shown below. If there is a shortage in the following values, use an extension power supply module or an external DC stabilized power supply. Some MELSECNET/MINI-S3 remote I/O modules can be usedas I/O modules for an A2C. See Table 2.1 o the APCCPU User's f Manual.
A2C A2CCPU 10 Modules (A) 1
w
24 VDC
A2CCPUC24(PRF)
Ax21c
0.6 AY 13C AY23C C AY51 AY61 CE A
0.058
0.056
0.055
0.055
0.18
0.093
-I-
AX80Y80C 0.082
A2C Special-Function Modules (A) 0.1 5 10.15

I
A68ADC
1 AD62C
AD61 C
A64DAIC A64DAVC A64 R D3C 0.2
0'12
I A64RD4C
10.15
10-13
10. POWER SUPPLY MODULESELECTION

10.4 Selection of a Power Supply Module for an A l , A2, and A3 Type CPU
(1)
MELSEC-A
5 VDC current consumption of each module

The current consumption capacity of power supply modules and the 5 VDC current consumption of all modules are shown below.Select power supply modules by using the following chart.
5 VDC current consumption of each module (A)

A61P
5VDC 5 A 24VDC 0.8 A
5 VDC 8 A
A3ACPU
5 VDC 2 A 24VDC 1.5A
I
l n w t Modules Ax10 Ax20 Ax40 k50-Sl 1.2A AX60 Ax60-S 1
AX50
Output Modules AYlOA
M
24VDC AlCPU AlNCPU
5 VDC 5 A 24VDC 0.8 A
o.06
AY11A AYllE AY13E AY 23 AY40 AY4OA AY41 AY42 AY50 AY60 AY6OE AYE0
0.59
Ax71 Ax8 1 AX42 Ax82
I 0.19 I 1 0.23 I I 0.29 I
0.12
I A42XY
Dynamic Combined I10 Module

10.11
0.12
AY6OS1 AYGOEP AYIOEP
AY 70 AY71 AYE1 EP 0.23 0.29 AY82EP
10 - 14
MELSEC-A
Special-Function Modules A161 A1 1VC 0.6 AD61 ( S l ) A68ADiA68ADS2 A84AD A62DAlA62DASl AD70 Interrupt output Audio High-speed counter 0.3 A-D conversion D-A conversion 0.9 0.6 A-D and D-A conversion 0.24 0.14
Peripheral Devices A8PUE AD71TU AGGPP AGHGP sumed. A6PHP con-
LS/A62LS A61
I Position detection
A-D conversion Temperature-digital conversion
1.5
I 0.9
I
0.811.5
II
I I
~~ ~
A616AD/A60MX(R) A616TD/A60MXT
110.5 1lo.a
1-1
1
A616DAVA616DAV
I D-A conversion
Data link
I 0.310.38
1.912.2 0.2310.26
P321T32 AJ71 AJ71C22
I Data link (MINI)

I Multidroo link
Communications Control MELSECNETIMINI-S3 0.35 BINET interface SUMINET interface Terminal interface Memory card Centronics interface
AD51 AD51S3/AD51 H gC$7/AD57Sl/AD57G AD58 AJ71 PT32-S3 AJ71662 AJ71 P41 AD71C211AJ71C21Sl AD591AD59-Sl
LA
1.2111.5511.1 0.17 0.410.7 (Without power supply equipment) 0.8
1.311.O
1
1.3
0.3
10- 15

(2)
MELSEC-A
Application standard for an extension base which does not need a power supply module With the Type A55B or A58B extension base unit, 5 VDC is supplied from the power supply module of the main base unit via the extension cable. Therefore, some voltage drop occurs over the extension cable and the specified voltage is not supplied to the receiving end, resulting in mis-input and mis-output. It is recommended that theA55B and A58B units be connected behind the main base unit to minimize voltagedrop. Select theavailability by calculationsusing the followingselection conditions: (a) Selection conditions
1) The 5 VDC output voltage of a power supply module is 4.9 V or
greater.
2) 4.75 VDC or greater at the receiving end of a base unit 3) The overall distance of an extension cable is 6.6 m or less. (b) How to calculate receiving end voltage Resistance value of cable ACO6B: 0.019 R AC12B: 0.028 R AC30B: 0.052 R
Basic base
A55B or A586 base
I1 + 12
---
I1
I
A55B or A586 base
V1 : Voltage drop of caMe between basic base and extension base V2 : Voltage drop of cable between extension base R1 : Resistance of caMe between basic base and extension base R2 : Resistance of cable between extension bases I1 : Current consumption of 5 VDC used for the 1 st extension stage 1 : Current consumption of 5 VDC used for the 2nd ex2 tension stage
Voltage drops VI and V2 are:
10- 16
IO. POWER SUPPLY MODULE SELECTION

the following expression:
MELSEC-A
The voltage of receiving end at the 2nd extension stage must satisfy Farthest base voltage = 4.9
- (VI + V2)
> 4.75
In order to satisfy the condition that the voltage final stage should at the be 4.75 V or more, the following conditions should hold: 4.9
- 4.75 2 v 1 + v 2 0.15 2 RI (I1 + 12) + R2l2
Under the above conditions, the A55B or A58B can be used for two extension stages. Therefore, the number of A55B or A58B extension modules which may be powered from one power supply is limited by the voltage drop between the main base unitand the farthest base unit. 0.15 2 total of voltage drop upto receiving end
Calculation example
- - -
- - - - -
Basic base
A580
Total of 5 VDC
v2
1 1
I
I
Resistance value of AC12B = 0.028 $2 VI = 0.028 X (3 + 2) = 0.14 [VI V2 = 0.028 x 2 = 0.056 [VI VI
( 9
A C l d
Total of 5 VDC current consumption: 2 A
I
I
+ V2 = 0.196 [VI
Receiving end voltage of 2nd extension stage is 4.9 - 0.196 = 4.704 V
10-17
I I I
I
MELSEC-A
Therefore, since the voltage drop is the 0.15 or more, the A55B cannot be used at the 2nd extension stage on this condition. In this case, the A55B can be used by changing the cableto ACO6B. (Resistance value = 0.019 f2)
VI = 0.019 X (3 + 2) = 0.095 [VI Vp = 0.019 X 2 = 0.038 [VI VI
I I
+ V2 = 0.133 [VI
Receiving end voltage of 2nd extension stage is 4.9 - 0.133 = 4.707 V
I L
r
POINT
- - - - - - - - - - - - J
Thus, since the voltage drop is 0.15 V or less, the A55B can be used for the 2nd extension stage on this condition.
I I
When using I/O modules and special function modulesof which internal current consumptionis large, load such modules into an extension base (A65B, A68B) which requires a power supply module.
10-18

(3)
24 VDC currentconsumption of each module
MELSEC-A
The 24 VDC output current capacity of power supply modules and the 24 VDC current consumption of all modules are shown below. If there is ashortage in thefollowingvalues,useanexternal DC stabilized power supply.
A61 P
5 VDC 8 A
A62 P
5 VDC 5A 24 VDC 0.8 A
Relay contact outp
A63 P (24 VDC input)

5 VDC 8 A
Special-Function Modules
A65 P
5 VDC 2 A 24 VDC 1.5 A
A66 P
I 2 4 VDC 1.2 A
1 AlCPU
5 VDC 5A 24 VDC 0.8 A
10-19
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 1 MELSEC-A QC Procers Chart Mitsubishi PC MELSEC-A series QC process chart
1I 1) Parts status I I I I I I
MELSEC-A
I I I
I I I I
'I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .I I I I I I I I I --------------I
I C
RA parts Differentll shaped parts Burn-in heat cycle
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I
0
Visual
SOPIC Chip parts
0
soldering
13) Module state I I assemblyModule I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Packing I
. --------.------
Tests using a dedicated tester Insulation resistance inspection mercial test Withstanding voltage check All-functions test Waveform check Battery current measem aging test urement Tapping test
---
.. .
PC combination shipment Aging test Name plate attachment Attachment of
P bard
ShiDment
I
Operation confirmation and function test Pattern disconnection Short-circuit inspection Part rating inspection Soldering inspection Through hole inspection
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1
I I I I I I I I I I I I
__---(Endurance test is included.)
- - - - - I
I I_
APP - 1
APPENDIX
Qc Pr-888
MELSEC-A
I Inspection m d Test Items I

Heat shock Bum-in
Inspoction Contonh, Conditions, etc. Vanes according to the rating of individual parts. Execute at the upper and lower limits of the storage temperature. (ex. 4 0 OC/+150 O , etc.) C When power is supplied, perform tests at the max. allowable temperature of the individual parts. When power is not supplied, perform tests at the max. storage temperature of the individual parts. Confirm all functions by using individual parts programs. Check the part model name on the printed card. Secure the polarity of the parts and the installation state. Check all the places to be soldered. Check for P board pattern disconnection, short and check part polarities and ratings.
Part acceptance inspection
Individual
level
part
TOW inspection of IC and special management Parts
Baking Function test
P board visual inspection Part model name inspection Except the check by ICT of post process (total inspection) Card level Part installation state inspection Soldering state inspaction
Check for disconnections ICT and ladder short circuits In-circuit board tester circuits polarity and rating Part checks Heat cycle (general)
Power heat cycle
test
of the A and LM series,

and part of the
Function test (All types
a test for 24 hours Or more at the upper and lower limits of allowable ambient temperatures.
K series)
Operation confirmation function
Power supply voltage fluctuation DIP test Noise test Noise application test (Products When they are delivered at the firsttime) . Momentary power failure Module . test level
I
I
Function test by using a dedicated tester Test functions at 85 of the rated voltages
V0
Apply a specified noise to an AC power input terminal, and perform the test. Confirm the function by performing a momentary power failure for the specified time. Test all functions and characteristics by using a dedicated tester. Check whether it is 5 MR or more by using a 500 VDC insulator. Apply 180 VAC for 1 sec, and perform the test. (Set current: 10 mA)
Function test Insulation resistance inspection (specific model) Withstanding voltage test (100 VAC ladder)
Commercial test (total)
APP - 2
MEMO
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT A-SERIES SYSTEMS
1. 1 1.1 Basic Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.2, Troubleshooting .......................................................... 1.2.1 Troubleshooting flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.2.2 Flow chart used when the "POWER" LED has turned off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 1.2.3 Flow chart used when the "RUN" LED has turned off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 1.2.4 Flow chart used when the "RUN" LED flickers ......................... 1-5 1.2.5 Flow chart used when "ERROR" LED has turned on (only A1 and A2 CPUs) ............................................. 1 6 1 7 1.2.6 I/O module troubleshooting .......................................... 1.2.7 Flow chart used when a program cannot be written to the programmable controller ..................................... 1 10 1.3 Error Codes ............................................................ 1 11 1.3.1 How to read error codes ........................................... 1 11 1.3.2 Error code list .................................................... 1 13 1.3.3 Self-diagnosis .................................................... 1 20 1.3.4 Judging the quality of a CPU ....................................... 1 - 22 1.3.5 Special relay M ................................................... 1 - 23 1.3.6 Special register D ................................................. 1 - 28 1.4 I/O Connection Troubleshooting ........................................... 1 38 1.4.1 Input circuit troubleshooting ........................................ 1 - 38 1 41 1.4.2 Output circuit failures and corrective actions .........................
1 1 41 ................. 1 . . .
2 COMMON ITEMS OF SPECIAL-FUNCTION MODULES
3 A.D, D-A CONVERSION MODULES
2.1 Special-Function Modules ................................................. 2-1 2.2 Relationship Between PC CPUs and Special-Function Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2.3 Buffer Monitoring and Forcible Changing of Current Values by Using Peripheral Devices ............................................... 2 - 2
....................
-1-2-3
-
3.1AOJ2.68AD, A68AD Analog-to-Digital Conversion Module ..................... 3 1 3.1.1 Write date error code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 3.1.2 Troubleshooting flow chart .......................................... 3 - 2 3.1.3 Flow chart used when "RUN" LED has flickered ........................ 3-3 3 -4 3.1.4 Flow chart used when "RUN" LED has turned off ....................... 3.1.5 Flow chart used when digital output value cannot be read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 3.1.6 Flow chart used when data. such as the number of channels, cannot bewritten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7 3.2 A68ADC Analog-to-Digital Conversion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -8 3.2.1 Error code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 8 3.2.2 When the RUN LED flickers or turned OFF ........................... 3 10 3.2.3 When the LINK RUN LED turned OFF or the LINK ERR . LED turned ON - 3 - 10 3.2.4 When read of digital output values is impossible ...................... 3 11 3.3 AlS64AD Analog-to-Digital Conversion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12 3.3.1 Error code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 12 3.3.2Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
.................................... 3 - 1 - 3 - 47
-
3.4 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 14 3-14 3.4.1A68AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 AOJ2-68AD ....................................................... 3 15 3.4.3A68ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 16 3.4.4 AlS64AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 18 3 - 19 3.5 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 3.5.1A68AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.2AOJ2-68AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 3.5.3 A68ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21 3.5.4 AlS64AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22 3 - 23 3.6 Wiring Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Unit Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23 3.8 AOJ2-62DA and A62DA Digital-to-Analog Conversion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24 3 24 3.8.1 Troubleshooting flow chart ......................................... 3.8.2 Flow chart used when "RUN" LED has flickered or turned off . . . . . . . . . . . 3 25 3.8.3 Flow chart used when analog output is not provided properly . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 26 3.9 A64DAVC/DAIC Digital-to-Analog Conversion Unit .......................... 3 28 3 - 28 3.9.1Errorcode list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30 3.9.2 When the RUN LED flickers or turned OFF ........................... 3.9.3 When the LINK RUN LED turned OFF or the LINK ERR . LED turned ON . 3 30 3.9.4 When analog output is not provided correctly ......................... 3 - 31 3 32 3.10 A1 S62DA Degital-to-Analog Conversion Module ............................ 3.10.1 When the RUN LED flashes or goes OFF ............................ 3 - 32 3.1 0.2 When the analog value is 0 V/O mA ................................. 3 32 3.1 0.3 When analog values are offset values ............................... 3 - 33 3.1 0.4 Analog values are output although the CPU module is set to STOP . . . . . . 3 - 33 3.10.5 When analog values output although the output enable flag (Y10 and Y11) is reset ............................................. 3 - 34 3.1 0.6 When digital and analog values do not match ......................... 3 34 3.10.7 WDT error flag (XO) is set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 35 3.1 0.8 D-A conversion READY flag ( X l ) i sreset ............................ 3 - 35 3 - 35 3.1 0.9 Error flag (X2) is set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 6 3.11.1 A62DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 6 3 - 37 3.1 1.2 AOJ2-62DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38 3.1 1.3 A64DAVClDAIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 1.4A I S62DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40 3.12 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 42 3.12.1 A62DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 3.12.2 AOJ2-62DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 43 3.12.3 A64DAVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 44 3.12.4 A64DAIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45 3.12.5 AlS62DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 46 3.13 Wiring Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 47 3.14 Module Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 47
4 HIGH-SPEED COUNTER MODULES
5 MELSECNET II
4.1 AOJ2-D611 AD61.and AD61 -S1 High-speed Couter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 1 4 4.1.1 High-speed counter module does not count ............................ 4 1 4.1.2 Counter value is incorrect ........................................... 4-3 4.2 AD61C High-speed Counter Unit ........................................... 4-4 4.2.1 Error code list ..................................................... 4-4 4.2.2 RUN LED is flickering/OFF .......................................... 4-5 4.2.3 LINK RUN LED is OFF .............................................. 4-5 4.2.4 LINK ERR . LED is ON .............................................. 4-5 4.2.5 Count operations do not execute ..................................... 4-6 4.2.6 Count value is incorrect ............................................. 4 - 7 4-8 4.3 AD62C Hig-Speed Counter Unit ............................................ 4.3.1 Error code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8 4.3.2 RUN LED is flashing/OFF .......................................... 4 10 4.3.3 LINK RUN LED is OFF ............................................. 4 10 4.3.4 LINK ERR . LED is ON ............................................. 4 10 4 11 4.3.5 Count value is incorrect ............................................ 4.4 A1 SD61 High-speed Counter Module ...................................... 4 - 12 4.4.1 Error code list .................................................... 4 - 12 4.4.2 RUN LED flashes or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 13 4.4.3 Counter value is incorrect ......................................... 4 - 14 4.4.4 Count cannot be made . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 14 4-15 4.5 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 15 4.5.1 ADGl(S1) ........................................................ 4.5.2 AOJZ-D61(Sl) .................................................... 4 16 4.5.3 AD61C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 17 4.5.4AD62C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 4.5.5 AlSD61 .......................................................... 4-21 4.6 Performance Specifications............................................... 4 22 4.6.1 ADGl(S1) ........................................................ 4 - 2 2 4.6.2 AOJ2-D61(Sl) .................................................... 4-23 4.6.3AD61C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 4.6.4AD62C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 4.6.5 AlSD61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 4.7 Wiring Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27 4.8 Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
...................................
.. . 1 4 27
5.1 Link Monitoring by Using GPP. HGP andPHP ............................... 5 . 1 5.1.1 Master station link monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1.2 Local station link monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5.1.3 Remote I/O station link monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10 5.2 Monitoring the Special Relays and Special Registers Used for the Link . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 5.3 Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15 5.3.1 General troubleshooting flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15 5.3.2 Troubleshooting flow chart for when the data link is disabled throughout the entire system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
......................................................
5... 1 5 54
at a specific station ............................................... 5 - 18 5.3.4 Troubleshooting flowchart for when a data sendheceive error occurs . . . . 5 - 20 5.3.5 Troubleshooting flowchart for when unspecified number of slave stations become faulty ..................................... 5 25 5.4 Error LED Indicators ..................................................... 5 26 5.5 Link Special Relay and Special Register ................................... 5 27 5.5.1 MELSECNET data link ............................................. 5 27 5.5.2 MELSECNET/B data link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 39 5.6 Self-Diagnosis Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 47 5 - 47 5.6.1 Self-loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 49 5.6.2 Station-to-station test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.3 Forward loop test and reverse loop test .............................. 5 51
5.3.3 Troubleshooting flow chart for when the data link is disabled
.. iv
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT ASERIES SYSTEMS

1-2.3 Fbw chart used when the "RUN" LED hes tumd off
MELSEC-A
Thissectionexplainstheflowchartwhenthe during operation.
"RUN" LED hasturned off
'RUN' LED hasturned OFF.
Connect a PU or GPP and read the error code (See Section 1.3.1).
YES
Take corrective action according to the error code list.
No
'RESET' CPU.
YES
(1) Due to defective PC parts or aconnectionfailure. (2) Due to excessive noise.
In case of (1) switch on CPU module to STOP and write END to address 0 with the peripheral (See Section 1.3.4).
In case of (2)
I
Consult your nearest Mitsubishi with details.
I
Move the RUWSTOP representative switch to RUN.
trurned ON?
lyEs
Software error. Check program with programmer and correct the program.
1 1
Connect noise suppression circuit, such as CR, to noise source.
1-4
1 GENERAL INFORMATIONABOUT A-SERIES SYSTEMS
MELSEC-A
The following flowchart shows the procedure when the RUN LED goes ON when the power supply is turned ON or when operations are started. However, in the case of an A3CPU, an error message is displayed, check and make corrections accordingto the error code list of Section 1.3.
+
'RUN' LED flickers.
Check t h e error with peripheral device (SeeSection 1.3).
Does the
Consult your nearest Mitoubishi representative with details.
I switchto
STOP wiition.
'RESET'the CPU.
Correct the error (See Section 1.3).
Move the 'RUN' key
6
Complete
1-5
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT AlSERlES SYSTEMS

1.2.5
MELSEC-A
Fkw chart w8d when "ERROR" LED has tumd on (only A1 and A2 CPUs)
This section explains the flow chart when the "ERROR" LED come on at power-on or at the start off or during operation. (In the case of A3CPU, an error message is displayed on the LED indicator located on the front face of the CPU. Therefore, correct the error in accordance with the error massage, referring to the "error code list" in Section 1.3,)
'ERROR'
LED has
I
Mitsubishi nearest Consult your representative with details.
Check the error with peripheral device (PU, GPP or HOP) (See Section 1.3).
Does the diagnosis reveal a
' I
I
'RESET' the CPU.
Correct the error (See Section 1.3).
r
Move the 'RUN' key switch STOP position. to
Move the 'RUN' key switch to RUN position.
IN0
YES
1-6
1-17
Complete
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT AISERIES .

~,
MELSEC-A
1.2.6
VO moduk troubhhooting
This section explains I/O module troubleshooting.
(1) Flow chart when the PC side input goes ON even though the external
input device is OFF
*u
I
hh Q . U smd?
Is Fa inprlo1?
YES
YES
/POINT1 An external factor can be a faulty external device, faulty external power supply, bad wiring, or noise.
1-7
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT ASERIES

goes ON when the external input device is ON.
MELSEC-A
(2) The following flow chart explains what happens if the PC side input
YES
I/
1-8
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUTASERIES

output module does not go ON during operations.
MELSEC-A
(3) The following flow chart explains what happens when the load of an
In such cases, the cause could be oneof the following:
1) Wiring malfunction on the load side, or faulty power supply or load 2) Faulty output module or blown fuse in the output module
3) HMI fault; i.e., the CPU, base unit, or cable
4) Program malfunction
5) Faulty input module

6) Malfunction in the input device or in the wiring/power supply
the input side
on
..
OV
1-9
1. GENERAL INFORMAllON ABOUT ASERIES

1.2.7
MELSEC-A
#ow chart wed when a program cannot be written to the programmablecontroller
This section explains flow chart when program cannot be written to the CPU (The memory EEPROM in the following flow chart is used only with an AOJ2 or A1 type CPU).
RESEP CPU.
I
YES
1-10
1 GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT A-SERIES SYSTEMS

1.3
MELSEC-A
Error Codes
When an error occursinthe PC RUN or RUN state, the errorwhich is displayed or error code (including the step number) is stored in a special register (09008) by the self-diagnostic function. This section explains how to read the error codes when an error occurs, their causes, and corrective actions to take. Perform the proper corrective action and remove the error cause.
1.3.1
How to read e m r codes

When an error occurs, error codes can be read by using an A7PU, AGGPP, AGHGP, or AGPHP.
(1) When an A7PU is used
The following is displayedon a LCD screen by these key operations: .When the error code is 10, 13, 46, or 50. A: Error step number (5-digit max.) B: Error message
-rn In the case of an error code other than those above T ERRORBNO.
J
- - - - - - - - - _ .- - - - - - - - - - -
---------
____________________
~
A: Error code B: Error message
(2) When an AGGPP, AGHGP, or AGPHP is used
Operations
[Select the error step.
-----
Error codes are displayed sequentially by using the [GO] key.
DEVICE FOR P-hl VALE COWVERSION STEP ERROR sm'ffi R E W E RUN REYOTE PAUSE REUOTE STOP REyoTr STEP Wly DEVICE Y x y ALL CLEM Kr
CLEMPCYKIIY
When the error code is 10, 13, 46, or 50, the error step number is displayed. In the case of other error codes, use the following methodto perform PC diagnosis to check the error message that corresponds to an error code:
1-11
1. GENERAL INFORMATON ABOUT ASERIES SYSTEMS

Operations
MELSEC-A
[GI
@
;--- cursor key is moved to PC DIAGNOST + The
In thecase of an A2A and A3ACPU A list of 16 items max. of past history can be displayed by pressing the [Setting] key.
ERROR & S A G E
P*STERRORS<PRSSWTORE#D.
46: SP. UMT ERROR
STEP DETMS
( W 0 1 0 ) . 25 (D0091).461
eo a nr r rr l u
2 4
1
DATA 1
DATA?
DW
46 :SP. UHt
70 : *R B Y n ERROR 31 : N VERlFV ERR UI T 0 : I C DOWN
12
461
2~
00.1.12 w.1.12 w.1.12
nus
11.5S.10 11.55.u 11.58.11 12,1234
w.1.12
Error codes can be also checked by using a peripheral deviceto monitor the contents of special registers D9008, D9010, and D9091.
1-12

1.3.2
MELSEC-A
Error code H M
When an error occurs at PC RUN or during RUN or during RUN, the error is displayed or error code is stored in special register 09008, the detailed error code is stored in special register D9011 by the self-diahnostic function. The error content and corrective action are shown in Table below. Only the A2ACPU and A3ACPU have detailed error code (D9091). The AOJ2 type CPU does not have a ' symbol.
Error Cod. (Dooos)
Error Message
Error and Cauea
Corrective Action
(1) Read the error step by peripheral device and correctthe program of that step. (2) Check to see if ROM has an undecodable instruction code and replace with ROM which has the correct content. Read the error step by peripheral device and correct the program of that stem
hn unrecognized instruction code is s i n g used.

101
102 103 104
index is qualifying for a 32-bit
mnstant.
The &vice specified by extension spplication instructionis incorrect. The program structure of the extension application instruction is incorrect. The command name of the extension application instructionis incorrect. There is a place where index qualifying with2 or V is made in the program in [LEDNBI IX] to [LEDNB I IXEND].
105
10
106
107
:Checked at STOP -$ RUN juring nstruction sxecution)
(1) The device number and set value in the OUT instruction of the timer and counter are qualified by an index. (2) The label number of pointer (p) assigned to a destination head of [CJ], [SCJ], [CALLI, [CALLPI, (JMP], [LEDNBI FCALL], [LADNB I BREAKj instructions or the label number of interrupt pointer (I) assigned to an interrupt program head is qualified by an index.
Error other than 101 to 107 above
108
1-13

Error Code
MELSEC-A
Error y.cuPy(e
1 -(
btaiied Error Code (09001)
Error and Cause
Corrective Action
'PARAMERER ERROR' 111
The capacity settings of the main program, subprograms, microcomputer programs, file register comments, status latch, dampling trace or extension file registers are not within the usable CPU range. The total of the set capacities of the main program, subprograms, file register comments, status latch, sampling trace and extension file registers exceed the memory cassette capacity. The latch range in paramerers or the M, L, S setting is incorrect. Sum check error Paramter remote RUN/PAUSE contacts, the run mode at error occurrence, the annunciator display mode or the STOP + RUN display mode settings are incorrect. Parameter MNET-MINI automatic refresh settina is incorrect. Parameter timer settings are incorrect. Parameter counter settings are incorrect. There is no END (FEND) instruction in the main Droaram. Subprogram has been allocated in the parameters and this as no END(FEND) instruction. The device number of pointer (P) or interrupt pointer (I) used asthe label added to the destination head is duDlicatina. The label of pointer (P) specified by [CJ], [SCJ], [CALL], [CALLP], [JMP], [LEDNB 1 FCALL], [LADNB I BREAK] instructions is not specifide prior to the END instruction.
Read the paramerers in the CPU memory and rewrite to the memory after checking and correctingthe content.
112
11
113 114
115 Checked at joweron, STOP + RUN, ~nd PAUSE + 1UN)
116 117 118
MISSING iND INS.' Checked at STOP + RUN) CAN'T iXECUTE (P).
121 12 122
Write END in main program. Write END in subprogram. Remove the duplicated number of pointer (P) with the destination head and correct so that the number is not duplicated. Read the error step by peripheral device, check the content, and insert destination pointer (P).
131
.,
[
132
13
133 Checked at
he execution
If
instruction)
(1) Even though the [CALL] instruc- (1) Read the error step by periphtion is missing, the [RET] insteral device, check the content, ruction has been executed since and correct the program at that it is inthe program. step. (2) Even though the [FOR] istruc(2) Nesting level for the [CALL], lion is missing, the [NEXT] and [CALLP], and [FOR] instructions must be 5 or less. [LEDNB 1 BREAK] instructions have been executed since they are in the program. (3) Since the nesting level for the [CALL], [CALLP] or [FOR] instruction is 6 or deeper, the 6th level nest has been executed. (4) The [RET] or [NEXT] instruction is missing at execution of the [CALL1 or [FOR1instruction.
1-14
1. GENERAL INFORMATIONABOUT ASERIES SYSTEMS

. ....
,I
.,. ,,
,/i , F
MELSEC-A
Error Y.++rge
Detailed Error Code (D9001)
Enor and Caw0
CorncHve Action
Read the error step by peripheral device and erase the circuitof that [CHG] instruction.
'CAN'T EXECUTE (P)'
134
Even though subprogram settings am missing, the [CHG] instruction has been executed since it is in the program. instructions are not written as a set. (2) There are more than 32 sets of [LEDNB I 1x1to [LEDA I IXEND] instructions.
(1)[LEDNB 1 IX] to (LEDAI IXEND]

(Checked at the execution of instruction) 'CHK FORMAT ERR.'
(1)Read the error step by periph-
135
eral device, check the content, and correct the program at that
(2) [ii%NB 11x1to [LEDAl IXEND] instructions must be less than 33 sets.
141 142 143 144
Instructions other than LDX, LDIX, ANDX and ANlX (including NOP) are in the circuit block of the [CHK] instruction. There is more than 1 [CHK] instruction . The number of contact points in the circuit block of the [CHKJ instruction exceeds 150.
1 1
I I
Refer to the content of the detailed error code, and chedk and correct programs related to the[CHK] instruction.
The [LEDAI CHK] and [LEDAl CHKEND] instructions are not written as a set, or there are 2 or more sets.
145
The format of the block shown below preceding the circuit Mock of the [CHK] instruction is abnormal.
P254 lI?[CJI
PI 11
146 147
The D l device number of the [CHKI Dl 1 D2] instruction does not match the contact device number preceking the [CJP] instruction. There is a place where index qualification is made in the check pattern circuit.
Checked at STOPfPAUSE + RUN
148
tern circuit of [LEDA I CHK] to [LEDAI CHKEND] instructions. (2)There are 7 or more check condition circuits in [LEDAl CHK] to [LEDA I CHKEND] instructions. (3) The check condision circuit in [LEDAICHK] to [LEDAICHKEND: instructions have been created b) instructions other than X and Y contact instructions and I comparison instructions. (4)The check pattern circuit of [LEDA 1 CHK) to [LEDA 1 CHKEND instructions has been created by 257 or more steps.
(1)There is more than 1 check pat-
1-15

Detailed Error Code (DOOSl)
MELSEC-A
Error and Cause

The [IRETJ instruction exists outside the interrupt program and has been executed. No [IRET] instruction in the interrupt
Conoctive Action
Read the error step by peripheral device and erase the[IRET] instruction. Check and correct use of [IRET] instruction inside or outside interrup! program. Monitor special register D9011 by peripheral device, check whether or not there is aninterrupt program corresponding to the stored numeric values or whether or not the same number exists for the interrupt winter (I), and correct.
15
An interrupt module is being used though there is no corresponding interrupt pointer (I). At error occurrence, pointer (I)is stored in D9011.
16
LU I
1 Error of the CPU seauence oroaram I Possible hardware fault. consult . "
storage RAM
The memory cassette is not loaded. Turn the PC power supply OFF, and load the memorv cassette. your nearest Mitsubishi representative with details.
I
I
20
202 Error 203

204
of the work CPU
area RAM
CPU device memory enor

CPU address RAM error
21 1
t
The operation circuit executing Possible hardware fault, consult your nearest Mitsubishi index qualification in the CPU is not operating normally. representative details. with The CPU hardware (logic) is not operating normally. The operation circuit executing PC sequence program in the CPU is not operating normally. Scan time exceeds watchdog error monitor time. (1) User program scan time has in creased. (2) Momentary power failure during program scan has causedapparent scan time to increase.
21
212
213
22
(1) Check PC program scan time and reduce using the[CJ) instruction. (2) Check for momentary power failures by monitoring special register D9005.
24
241
The entire stored program has been (1) Reset CPU. executed without executing the END If error persists, possible hard ware fault, consult your nearest instruction. (1) The END instruction has been Mitsubishi representativewith missed (e.g. memory cassette redetails. moved during program execution). (2) The END instruction has been corrupted. ThemainCPU broken. is malfunctioning or Possiblehardwarefault, consult Mitsubishi nearest reoresentative with details.
26
your
31
Verified data is different from the Read the detailed error code by 1 0 data at power on. 1 peripheral device, check and (1) An I/O module (including special replace the module corresponding to functionmodule) has been rethatnumericvalue (I/O head movedformthebaseunitwhilenumber)ormonitor specialregisters the base unit while the P.C. power D9116 to D9123 by peripheral is switched on. device, check replace and the Or, wrong module is loaded. module where thatdatabit is * l o .
1-16
Error kk.tlgr
Error m d Cause
Cowactive Actlon
~
'FUSE BREAK OFF'
Output unit fuse blown.
32
(Checked continuously) 'CONTROLBUS ERR.' Incorrect FROM/TO instruction execution. During paramerer 110 assignment, special function modules cannot be accessed at initial communication. At errw occurrence, the head 110 number (the upper 2 digits of a 3dogit expression) of the special function module causing the error is stored in DM1 1 . No response from special function unit afterexecution of FROMflO Instruction. During parameter I10 assignmert, at initial communication, responses from special function modules have not been returned. At error occurrence, the head I 0 1 number (the upper 2 digits of a 3diget expression) of the special function module causing the error is stored in D9011.
AJ71R22 or A171 P22 located in master station.
(1) Check the fuse blown LED lndicator of the output module and replace the fuse of the lit module (2) Read the detailed error code by peripheral device and replace the fuse of the fuse of the output module corresponding to that numeric value (I10 head number) or monitor special registers D9100 to D9107 by peripheral device and replace the fuse of the output modulewhere that dat bit is '1 '.
40 1
~
Hardware fault(CPU, special function unit and/or base unit). Consult your nearest Mitsubishi representative with details.
40
402
'SP. UNIT DOWN'
41 1
Hardware error of the accessed special function module. Consult your nearest MitsuMshi representative with details.
41 41 2
'LINK UNIT ERROR'

'I10 INT.
42
Remove AJ71 R22 or AJ71 P22 from master station.

~~
ERROR'
Interrupt signal received with no interrupt module present.

43
Since a hardware error has occurred in one of the modules, replace the modules one by one to find the faulty module. Consult your nearest Mitsubishi representative with details.
~~
'SP. UNIT
LAY. ERR.'
44 1
+
I/O modules allocated in parameter settings by peripheral device have been allocated by special function modules. Or, the opposite settings have been executed.
Reset I10 assignments in parameters by peripheral device according to the loading status of the special function modules. Load less than 9 special function modules [except for the A161(S1)] which can start interrupts to the CPU. Load less than 2 AJ71 P22s or 2 AJ71 R22s.
44 442
More than 8 special function modules [except for the A161(Sl)] which can start interruptsto the CPU have been executed. More than 1 AJ71P22 or 1 A71R22 has been loaded.
443
1-17
Error Massage
Detailed Error Code
MELSEC-A
(F9091)
444
EWOFand Cause
Corroctivo Action
Load less than 7 computer link modules. Load only 1 A161. Reset the module assignments of the MNETMlNl automatic refresh in parameter settings by perpheral device according to the modules of station numbers actually linked. Decrease the number of loaded special function modules.
'SP. UNIT LAY. ERR.'
More than 6 computer link modules, etc., have been loaded to 1 CPU module. More than A161(S1) has been loaded. The modules of MNETMlNl automatic refresh allocated in parameter settings by periphsral device and the names of the modules of actually linked station numbers are incorrect. The number special function modules which can use dedicated instructions, registered by I10 assignment per one CPU module (number of modules to be loaded) is larger than the specified limit. (The total of computers shown below is 1344 or more.)
445
446 44
447
(Numbu of loukd AD59 X 5 ( N u m k r of loadod AD57(SllADS8 X E ( N u m k r of 1o.ad.d AJ71C2YS3) X 1 C (Number of l a d AJ7lCZl(Sl) X 28 od + (Number of IMded AJ7lPT32(S3) X 125 .Total >la4
'SP. UNIT ERROR' (Checked when FROM0 instruction, or special function module dedicated instruction is specified.) 'LINK PARA. ERROR'
46 1
There is no special function module in the area specified by the F R O M 0 instruction. There is no special function module in the area specified by the F R O M O instruction or there is no corresponding special function module.
~~
Read the error step by peripheral device, check and correct the content of the F R O M O instructior of that step. Read the error step by peripheral device, check and correct the content of the special function module dedicated instruction of tha step.
46 462
47
(1) The link range is set in parame(1) Re-Write link parameters form peripheral programming unit to ter settings by peripheral device, and for some reason, the content PC. written to the link parameter area (2) Persistent error occurrence may indicated hardware fault. Consu differs from the link parameter content read by the CPU. your nearest Mitsubishi representative with details. (2) 0 slave stations set. (1) When using file register (R), operations have been executed exceeding the specified range for the device number and block number of file register (R). (2) The file register is used in the program without executing file register capacity settings.
'OPERATION ERROR'
50 1
Read the error step by peripheral device, check and correct the program of that step.
50 (Checked during execution of instruction)
502
The combination of devices specified by instruction is incorrect.
1-18

, . ,
MELSEC-A
irror Massago
OPERATION ERROR'
Error and Caw.

The storage data of specified devices or the constants are not within the usable range. The quantity of settings used for handled data has exceeded the usable range.
(1) The station number specified by
Corrective Action
3ead the error step by peripheral kvice. check and correct the mgram of that step.
503
504
505
instruction [LEDNB I LREP], [LEDNB ILWTP], [LRDP] or [LWTP] is not a local station. (2) The b a d I D number by instruction [LEDNZ:&, [LEDAIB IRTOP], [RFRP] or [RTOPJis not a remote station.
506
The haad I/O number specified by instruction [LEDAIB I RFRP], [LEDNB IRTOP], [RFRP] or [RTOP] is not a special function module.
(1) While the AD57 (Sl) or the AD58 is executiong instructionsby partial procedding, other instructions have been output to the same module. (2) v i l e the AD57 (Sl) or the AD58 IS executing instructiuonsby partial processing, instructions have been output to other AD57 (Sl) 01 AD58 by partial processing.
50
507
b a d the error step by peripheral jevice and provide interlock by special relay M9066 or change the xogram structure and correct. This xevents the execution of other nstructions to the same module h i l e executing instructions to t h e 4D57 (Sl) AD58 by partial or xocessing and prevents the 3xecution of instructions to other 4057 (St) or AD58 by partial xocessing.
:1) Read the error step by peripheral device and correct the program meeting loaded conditionsof remote terminal module. :2) Provide interlock using M9081 (communication request registration areas BUSY signal) or D9081 (number of vacant areas in the communication is executed to a remote terminal. 3 Execute the [PIDCONT] instruction after execution of the lPlDlNlTl instruction. Execute t h e [PlD57] ihstruction after executior of the lPlDlNlTl and lPlDCONT1 instruciions.
:1) Remove INT
:Checked juring sxecution of nstruction)
509
(1) An instruction whichcannot be executed by remote terminal module connected to the MNETMINI-SI was executed to the modules. (2) When the [PRC] instruction was executed to a remote terminal, the communication request registration areasoverflowed. (3)The [PlDCONTj instructionwas executed without executing the [PIDINIT] or [PIDCONT] instruction. The [PID57] instructionwas executed without executing the [PIDINIT] or [PIDCONT] instruction. (1) INT instruction processed in microcomputer program area. (2) CPU malfunction due to noise. (3)Hardware fault. (1) Battery voltage low. (2) Battery not connected.
'MAIN CPU DOWN'
60
:2) Eliminate noise. 7 ) Hardware fault

:1) Replace the battery.
'BATTERY ERROR' Checked at mweron)
12) When using RAM memory or the power failure compensation function, load connectors.
1-19
1. GENERAL INFORMATIONABOUT ASERIES SYSTEMS

1.3.3 Selfdiagnosis
MELSEC-A
When an error occurs in the PC RUN state, the CPU is stopped by using self-diagnosis, and the error is displayed. Error contents are shown in the following table. The following error code list explains the processing methods for error cancellation.
"RUN" LED Status
Self-Diagnosis List
Error Indication Conhnts
A1 and AXPU LED Display (AB(A)CPU only) Applicable CPU M o l Namo
Dianoris
CPU Statur
Dirpl8yr
LED
- . 0
AOJ
0
A1 A3 A2
Memory Instructionexecution 3nor disable Format (CHK instruction) check
u I
(Parameter settingcheck No END instruction
Instruction code check
ON
INSTRCT. CODE ERR PARAMETER ERROR MISSING END INS. EXECUTE CAN'T
0
0
0
0
ON
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Flicker
ON ON ON
~CHKFORMAT ERR.
I - 1
Instruction execution disable CASSETTE ERROR
Operation circuit check SPU Watchdog error check
END instruction unexecution
Endless loop execution, MAIN CPU malfunction

IO mor
Flicker
SUB-CPU ERR0
WDT ERROR
I module verify 1 0
Fuse blow Control bus check
ON
FUSE BREAK
OFF
Special function unit error special unction nodule Linkmoduleerror mor I/O interruption error Special function module assignment
stop
Flicker
~~~~
ON
I INT. 1 ERROR 0
ON
ISP. UNIT ERR. LAY.
1-20
MELSEC-A
App'icaMo M o l Namo
I I
Dianosis
I
ERROR
Error Indic8tion Contonts

LED Display Displays
~~~
I
0
""
A1 A3 A2
ON
;. %& module
error
I
Special function module error Link parameter error Run On
SP.UNIT PARA. ERROR LINK ON
0 0
0 0
0 -
0 0
0 0
' Operation check error
ON
OPERATION ERROR MAIN-CPU DOWN
MAIN CPU malfunction Flicker Stop
RE MARKS^
1. When two types of contents are described in the CPU state and the RUN LED state area, the setting can be changed by using a peripheral device (GPP). 2. When the error contents of an instruction are CHK in a 'symbol operation check error,the LED displaymessage is as follows: c C H L ERROR [ I[ ][ ] -Displays the 3-digit faulty number.
3. *Shows OFF when an M C P U is used.

1.3.4
MELSEC-A
Judging the quality of a CPU

The quality of a PC CPU can be judged by turning ON the power supply under the normal start conditionsof a sequence program. Write the END instruction to step 0 of the sequence program. If RUN LED is ON when the CPU is set to RUN, the CPU qualitey is acceptable.
(1) Operations by using an AGGPP 1) Paramerers and programs are read using the following operaby tion from the CPU to the AGGPP. Key operations
E0 lGO 2) Write the END instruction to step 0.

Parameter + main
F lF l
00
However, when the CPU quality is acceptable and programs do not need changing, write down step0 of the list program(or insert an END instruction).
r lb l
Step 0 is read.
3) Set the CPU to STOP, and write this program to the CPU.
r;;;;l
Parameter + main
[Writing step 0 of the main program i sufficient.] s
1 4
4) Set the CPU to RESET.
5) Set the CPU to RUN. When the RUN LED is ON, the CPU quality is acceptable. If the RUN LED is OFF or flickers, the CPU is quality is not acceptable.
6) If the CPU quality is acceptable, return the program of step 0 that was written down to the original programand write it to the CPU. ,
1-22
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABQ,JT.,&SERIESSYSTEMS

8 . .
. ,
MELSEC-A
Special relays are internal relays of which applications have beendetermined inside the PC. Therefore, donotturn ON/OFF thespecialrelays on the program (Except the ones with numbers marked '1 and '2 in the table). Application acceptability varies accordingto the type of CPU.
All CPUs
AnACPU-F
booo7
Battory lor latch
OFF : N o d ON : Battery lar OFF : N o m r ON : nor OFF : NM o i ON . D . t c a d OFF : N o u m r ON : Enor OFF : Noonor ON : Enor
hSoaa enor i q n a t i c Sdd

Moooo
M9010
o T u m d ON w b n urn is bund u a m u t t d soil-d*gnais.
o T u d ON * . bRwy v o h p ndvol to loss than specifid. hn Renmim ON w n if M y wl(.o. b.ca*r normal. o
All CPUa
Lwll
;;z ;
Annuncdor &&ion
. T u r d W *h.n [OUT F] or [SET F] instruction is executed.
S * i w w d OFF whw, D o l 2 4 is z r o d . T u m d ON when op.nlion uror OCNS during u w u t i o n d .pPli&iOn inhp)ion.T u m d OFF when WOT eliminhd. is
*ration error flag
T u m d ON when opHrtion wor ootun during uocution of .pPlic&on intruetion. W m ON w e n if n o d status is rest&. .Carry flagused in .ppliationinntruetion.
d1 ..
h p f o r AnACPU-F a (
yw17 01 ..
I
1
drr flag
rmmory
User timing clock No. 0
I
I I
OFF : No procasing ON : Oulpuc c l u r
.Cham tho unlatched drta m o (other than s p u i d relays and mr y spdd in nwute tun mod. (mm canputor, stc. w h e n
Y-17
MWZ1
User timing clock No. 1
Relay whii r e p u t s O W F F at intuvab of prodetermind s m . Whon par i t u r n d on or m e t is prfornad, tho cbdr starts with s
nN
All CPUs
Sot tho i n l r r d s d W O F F by [DUTY] intruction.
)r(9027
Clock data display

Clock data
rd rqu.rl
OFF : No precessing ON : Dkphy OFF : No procuring ON : Rud n g ~ t
Switched ON by clock data ( O W to DW28) error

.Clock data is r a d from DW25 to 09028 and 1ndid.d on tho CPU front LED displ.y.
Gapt for I X C P U . AXCPUCZ*(PRF) and AOJZHCPU

A3NCPU.F and A3ACPU-F
Lw28
R u d s cbck d a h l o 09025 to D9028 in ECD when M9028 is ON. 0.1 I & . 0.2 scond. 1 sccnd. 2 SWS,minute c k k s and t u e generrtd. Not turned ON and OFF per roan but t u m d ON and OFF even during s u n i cwmponding lim hu el.pred. l *Starts with OFF r h . n p o w r is turned ON or mset is p r f o r n r d .
Exapt for AXCPU. AXCPUC24(PRF) and AWWCPU
All CPUs
1-23
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT A-SERIES SYSTEMS
+
ON onlv lor
Surp(ing
MELSEC-A
Appllablr C W
ON OFF
OFF
USdu d u w C O d initidbaion M d .pplicdian W insbwlion in seqprogram. MOO36 and Y-7 u t u r n d ON ud OFF without rogud to . p ik d key srri(ch on CPU lront. Yw1(1 and M9039 are at t undr ltm .m eoondition a RN status . - whon I . k v . x h 8 d O h ir d STOP poshion, ud t w n d On ud on. Switched OFF a ths key switch is in STOP position. Y W is ON lor om s e a only and WC49 is O f f lor OM .cu) onlv if th.kev All CPUs Whon RUN key switch ia a PAUSE pailion or remote p w e t hu t u r d ud if MOOU) is ON, PAUSE mode is ON sal and MOO41 i turned ON. .
~ S w i l c h d h e n the RUN k y switch is In STOP porilion. ON
OFF : PAUSE d i s w ON : PAUSE nuM.d OFF : Not during me ON : D u r i n g p w e OFF : Not durinO *lop ON : Duringstop OFF : During -ling ON
t M
: SMplmgtrue carpl.tpn
*Tumd ON upon m i o n d w@iw t m p d o r m d th. nu-r 01 timr w a d by pnr8nmt.r .hw [STRA] instruction ia u.wld.
0
+
M-7
Slmpling true pr.puration RUN LED Ikrhilap Switching thm nu-r
0+1 Tho s u n u [STRA] 1 4 Th. . [STRAR] I
Turning UDOU W O F F albm p s e u d w r d i o n of [STRA] ud [STRAW irmtruaionr.(M9044 b turned ONlOFF forcibly by w hd d w i c a . ) i r p
Rad w h w ISTRARI inhuetion is ~uutd.
OFF ON
: during : During ma
W h n M O W is turned lrom OFF to ON:[STRA] instruction W h w M O W b t u r n d from ON to OFF: [STRAR] instruction A I this t i m , a value s t a d in WOU is m d for a condition of u n p l i n g tmw. ( m s e a . rh.n lim -D t i m ( iunit 01 I O mu) m
E x m lor AlSCPU
m ON during surpling tM,
OFF : s.nPling trum stop ON : 1 R C . Starl ON annuKLLor is t u r d on OFF : D o not f*rh wh.n or l .mnunci.tor is h turned on
: 16 c h a r d e r r
O W
Turn Yo017 ON to sLut s.npling tr-. Turn it OFF to stop umliw trace.
All CPUs
: Flashes whm the
S.tr whothw the RUN LED f b h r b n the annunciator w d a y F[ ] is turned on byan AQIWCPu.
AOJPHCPU
Mggls
OFF : Up IO NULL code are ON
characters
0 a Ua
W b n Moo10 is Wh.n Moo10 is
On. up to NULL (WH) code are output. on.ASCII cd d 16 chracters v. output. oa
EXcspt for " X P U AXCPUCU(PRF)
Md
M005,
[CW instruction uuution disable instruction switching
OFF : Dissble ON : Enable OFF : 7SEG display ON : vo p e P . mfr*h i1
Switchd ON to disabk the[CHG] instruction. Switched ON when p r o g r a m transfer is r e q u n t d and autonutiully switched OFF when transkr is corrplole. Switched ON to exocuto the [SEG] instruction u M UO parlid r e h h irmtruction. Switched OFF to .x.cu(e t h e [SEG] instruction u a 7SEG display Instruction. *Switched ON to oxuute the l k r e i m h enable, d h W (El.
A3NCPU-F and A3ACPU-F
M O2 O5
PI1 CPUs
U9053
I M O 0, OFF ' - I I -K control ~nrtruct~on switchina ON : ~ i n, i (, * -(
Dl) i n * ~ r ~ ~ d i w .
T u W ON M e n status Ialch is conpkted Turned OFF by res* instruction.
Provides P, I set request after translor 01 the other program (lor e x ~ p l e subprogram wiwn main program is being RUN) . is complete during RUN. Autwrutiulb smtchd OFF when p. 1 renine h eonplde.
E x c w lor AnACPU-F Excwt lor A2CCPU. AXCPUC24(PRF) and AOJIHCPU

All CPUs
OFF : 0tk.r than st- RUN S w m h d ON when t b RUN key switch is in STEP RUN ON : During s h p R p ~ l i b o n . UN ON : P. I se4 request OFF : Other than P, I set request Subprogram rmauest ON : P. I s d request OFF : 0th.r t h n P.1 sei request OFF : ND(~wnpl.le ON : Compkte
A3NCPU.F and A3ACPU-F
OFF : Nomul ON : Error
Turned ON whon one of mmote twmlnd moduln h u become a Iauky statim. (Communicationerror h detected when normal communication is not restored allor the nurbor 01 retries set at D9174) Turned OFF when canmuniution with all remote terminal modules IS reatorsd to normal with automatic online return enabled. Remain8 ON whenautonutic onlirm mturn 18 d l u b k d . Not turned ON or OFF when communiccdim i s susmnded at
A X C P U and AICCPUC24(PRF)
1-24
I GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT A-SERIES SYSTEMS .
MELSEC-A
Applbabk CPU
-D m r l p t b n
OFF : Nomul ON : Enor
bmib
~ T u ON whw canmunidion with a W e terminal d moduk or an VO moduk is Iaulty. Camnunidion enor occurs duo 10 tho following r u I o n a Initial data errw P a r off fw r e m terminal moduloa or 10 mdn 1 ou l ~ T u m OFF w b n communit.(ion is mlod to n o d wiLh d aulormtic online roturn en*. B R.mim ON w h m m m u n i a t i o n auspndod a1 error h dotoolion with autorfutic online roturn disabled.
D
.c.b*bN&.9.
WCPU
m AXCPUC24(PRF) d
OFF : ON
during divid. procasing : Duringdwie p r W
E x +
In ttm p r o t r a i n g wilh M AD57(SlYADSe. t u r d ON when exuuting a ullvaa saoen transhrby d i v i u procoasing ud t u m d OFF when divide DroCasina has k n c o n p l a d . In the promsing with M AD57(Sl)/ADSe,t u r n d ON w h nn a u u t i n g a a v w a n l r m a h r by divide pmxaisng .
AdCPU-F
OFF : b t o h t r u n n i s i s o n ON : Dividotrmsmisrion
OFF : N d ON : Enor
Tumed ON rh.n one d VO m o d u l r haa h a Iauny n w station. (Communicdm w w oceun when normal communiulion is of ntrioa ae1 al D9174) not m t o r d diw th.nu+ . T w n d OFF whon cornmunicalion w i h a l l VO modules IS r e s s n d to ron lwith u t o m i c online M u m enabkd. tru I R d m ON whw autormtic online m u m is disabhd No( t u n d ON or OFF *rh.n communication is s u a p n d d al error dotdion.
e
A X C P U m AXCPUC24(PRF) d
Toal mode
OFF : Autonutic onlino n t u m .rubhd : Autonulic online roturn d i a M : Comruniution w s p o n d d at onlint

ON
: Linoclmeh
0O nT
T u m d ON whon line ch& wilh VO modula and remote terminal m o d u l r is perlormod. H t u r n d OFF, communicaim with VO modula and nmo(e terminal modula is perlormod.
AXCPU
O w l a lino t
OFF : No procuring ON : S e l r q u r b d OFF : N o w o r ON : Enor Clack dala
r u d r.qUn1
M9074
MW73
OFF : Noprocralng ON : R e d r o q u a l
Sets h a t h e r all wtputs are t u r d ofl or retained at communication enor .OFF ... All output8 are turned OH at communiation error .ON ..... Outpuls M o r e wnwnunicdm error r ti . od r W r i m cbck dala lrom 09073 Io 09076 lo t h e clod; e k m n t akn the END instruction ia e x u u t d during the scan in which MW73 h r r boon a d m h d lrom OFF to ON. T u r d ON whm t h e n ia a closk data (M9073 to D7076) error T u r d OFF w h there is no enor. When MW76 is ON, clock d a h is road horn D9073 to 09076 at the ECD valw.
Indication of communiulion .ruMJdls.ble lo remote terminal modulea connoctd to the W71PT32-S3 M AZCCPU.
A X C P U a d AXCPUC24(PRF) n
Communiulion m q w t
10 Nmo(0
tninal modUkr
OFF : CommuniUion reqlmt to m e luminal moduloa enabled ON : Communiulion

n q r m t to m
e luminal d u l o a dk.bkd
AnACPU-F. A X C P U and AXCPUC24(PRF)
Final amion number diaagmrnont
OFF : Final station number agr-nt ON : Final station number diugroornont
Error check
OFF : C h d s e r u M d ON : Ch.dtsdia&kd
eTurnd ON *rh.n the final slation number of the r w w t e terminal m o d u l r and n m d e VO m o d u l ~ s o n m t d to the c A2CCPU d i s a g r m with the total n u m k r of slaliona set in the initial selling. Turnd OFF when the ln l station numbor agrees wilh the i a told number 01 stations at STOP+RUN. Spocrty W h e r the following errors are to k c h d d or not pffer the [END] instruction is e x e c u i d (to reduce END p r w s i n g time): Fuse blown I/O una1verily error Turnd ON *rh.n output lrom 'ERR termirul' In the sequence program. Turnd OFF when both MOOB9 and MWBO are t u r n d OFF. * T u m d ON wh.n MINI43 linlr error or soquenco program W f O f ( W h OpdU! iS 810pp.d) OONfS. T u r n d OFF w h MINI-S3 link and aoquence program is r o a t o n d to normal. T u m d on when m o p . r a l i w error detail laclor ia s b n d to D-1. Remains on w e n whon the w m a l alatua is r n l a d .Turnd ON whon an M M acun whib exrutinga microcomputer @ q e . W m ON mwhen the normal
A2CCPU and PXCPUC24(PRF)
output
ERR termlnal
OFF : ERR tvminal OFF ON : ERRtaminalON OFF : ERR tuminal OFF ON : ERR tnminal ON
Excap4 for A X C P U and AXCPUC%(PRF)
Banmy error
A X C P U and AXCPUC24(PRF)
US091
Oprations
error
Microconputel subroutine call .nor 19 1 .
Dotail 11.11
OFF : NoError ON : Enor OFF : Noerror ON : Enor
AnACPU-F Except lor AnACPU-F
1-25

Numbor Ilur*
~~
MELSEC-A
A p p H a U a CPU
Dwrlptlon
&la
,2 .3
M -
tho
W ohng. O
OFF : Changd ON : Not clungod
*AftwUmhrdddnudth.npuirdVOmoduloiaa*to D W M .-a UW04 ON d l m tho VO modulo to be -inDnlbrmod.. ( O m modulo h only dkrd to be dungod by OM setling.) .To be auitchd ON in Um p g m or poriphoral device t a t on mod. to d u n p Hn moduk duCPU RUN. To k srritchod ON in p h a &o h a t mod. to change the r o4 i p i modulo durirg CPU STOP. RUFUSTOP modo m * t not b. changed until W module O
3 -
for AXCPU. L?CCPUC24(PRF)8nd AW2HCPU
dnwa u
'LQlot
'&lM
e T u m d ON H the SFC program u ngiahrod. and t u m d OFF il it ia not. SFC program saWslop OFF : SFC program stop ON : SFC p r q r a m a W Should k t u m d ON by tho program H tho SFC program is to be a t u h d . ii l u r n d OFF, opration output of tho oxuution 8t.p is t u m d OFF a d tho SFC propram is at. S . k a r t h . atulirrg stop rrh.n t h e SFC p r o g r a m ia mtartd
cno op. lt
SFC p m g r u n aorting atalus
OFF : Initidatad ON : Continuwr atart
u q u9101. i OFF : All oxuution conditiomwhon t h o SFC program at& are J m d , ud tho p g is a t a d d with cm o Um inai a1.p d bbdr 0. ON : S W d with h slop d lh blodr k i n g u c t when lo eu d the program at&.
Sokch wmowtiw or a w - r t o p t m 1 . r o atf of which tnnritiona M u t . b l i a h d &on dl 04 the trans~ttons d conauutivo stops uo n t . b l i . h d . ON : Cc+muutivo t r a m b r ia u u d u l
(Conarutiw tnnsform&b) OFF: or* step p a OM a m is iranafowed
Wptmfor monitoring t i m r atad (comaponds to 09108) Step transfer -2 monitoring MQlDg t i m r stml (cormponds to Dotoo) Step transfer monitoring *D M ~ II t i m r atart O (corresponds to 0 9 1 10)
.2
( C o n a r r l i w tr8naf.r d W o ) Sot h e n 0 n r r M h t r a m f u is nc4 u c u t o d with conrrutiw Iranafor onlbkd. R a o t rh.n trunlor of one atop is wmplotod. Comrutivo b8naf.r of a at- M be p n w n t d by witing an AND condition to correspondinn U9104.
MO108
411 CPUS
'2 monitoring m ~ ~ 1 1 t i1 r s u r t
stop
OFF : Monitoring t i m r
to 091 t 1)
.2
(corresponds
ON
: Monitoring t l m r
met
atart
Turned ON when the atop transfor m i w r o n g t i m ia st8ti.d. r Turned OFF when tho monitoring t i m r is mot.
Mol 12
Stop transfer monitoring t i m r start (corresponds to D9112)
.Z
M9113
Step transler monttoring t i m r st8i-t
(coneaponds to 091 13)
.2
Step transfer monitoring t i m r start ~9114 (corresponds to D9114)
Set rrh.n aampling trace is being executd. Rerot when aPmpllng trace is completd or aurpondad.
S o h aunpling tr&m u o u t b n enablddisable. ON : Sarrpling t r u e e x u u t i o n i s e n d e d OFF: Svrpling tr8m wccltion is dlsabld, ifturned off during sampling trace exbcution. trace is suspndad.
diaddauspond
1-26
MELSEC-A
POINTS~
(1) Contents of the M special relays are all cleared by powerOFF, latch clear or reset with the reset key switch. When the RUN key switch is set in the STOP position, the contents are retained. (2) The above relays with numbers marked +1 remain ON if normal status is restored. Therefore, to turn them OFF, use the following method. 1) Method by user program Insertcircuit the shown the right at into the program. andturn ON the reset execution command contact to clear the special relay M.
Hy
R.rtaaa&a
RSTIJ&gj2
spuid hmaisn r*.y 10 b. r e n t
2) Method using peripheral devices Perform forced reset by use of the test function of peripheral devices. For the operation procedure, refer to the manuals for peripheral devices.
3) By moving the RESET key switch on the CPU front to the RESET position, the special relays are turned OFF. (3) Special relays marked '2 above are switched ON/OFF in the sequence program.
(4) Special relays marked +3 above are switched ON/OFF in test mode of the peripheral device.
(5) Special relays marked '4 above are reset only when the power is turned from OFF to ON.
(6) Since M9102 is latched automatically, even if the power supply goes off, M9102 maintains its ONOFF state.
1-27

1.3.6
S p e c i e 1 mister D
MELSEC-A
Special registers are data registers of which applications have been determined inside the PC. Therefore, do not write data to the special registers in the program (except the ones with numbers marked '2 in the table).
Dwcrlpikn
Fuse blow module numkr Applicable CPU
DOOOO
F w e blown
Except lor AXCPU. AXCPUC24(PRF) and AOJIHCPU
Fuse blown
Fur. blam module nu-
2 3 4 5
1 2
4 5 6
2 3
5 6 7 8
AOJPHCPU
I 0 module 1 verify erm
UO d
u b wrify error moduh n u m k r
SUM
n vo d whish data u e diff.r.nt from data ento&, u e d.1oci.d w l w I l m par u t u r d m. l i n t 1 n u m k r 01 the th. 0 k r a t numbor module amongthe d.1modules is stored in hoxdwimrl. (Storing nwthod 6 tha s u m u that 01 D9ooo) To monitor the numkc by peripheral d w i n r . prlonn monitor -ration given in hoxndocinul. (Cleared whan all contenla of DWt6 I o D9t23 u e r m d to 0) Th. UO module of a nmote UO station is . h o nrilied. *Stormthe nut h l oarrponds to ttm W i n g switch n u h r or base unit numkr wtmn an 1 0 module is Mected 1h.l is different 1 from the regklwed 110 module inlomation when tho power supply w u t u r d on. ( h s w i n g m t h o dis Ih. s u m as M o l tho la D9W1.) m In the w e of a remote VO module. (module In nurrhrlt0w) + 1 is rtond.
The numbor d bits W r h d by uc o .u n i l d the SUM instruction em stond inBIN cod.and u d d w a u nthoruher. pa r . l y c i o
Stores th.ermr & d i m status of the MINI(S3) link tothe instalbd AJ71PT32(S3).
mod~lr.
ExcqJt lor AXCPU. AXCPUC24(PRF) and AOJPHCPU
AOJZHCPU
instmotion d a d i o n bits
dto by SUM e d d
Th.numb.rdt&
intruction detection
MINI link muter module error
Error detection status
AnACPU-F
MINI(S3) link communi1 i added each time Input vdtage beconm B O X or Ims of rUlng s while t h e CPU unii is performing operation. and the value is stared ir
AC DOWN counter
AC DOWN count
selfdugnortic
error
Solf-dlagnostic error nu-r
*When error is found as a r8suIt 01 self-diagnosis, error numbar is stored in BIN code.
All CPUs
1-28
1. GENERAL INFORMATIONABOUT A-SE,RIESSYSTEMS
MELSEC-A
WOQO
m t o
w o 11
Enor s b p
wot4
va oontrol
mod.
CPU k w switch
R.mins th. . nin nmolo u RUWSTOP mod.
Do015
I I
[STOP] Instruction exuution
Remde RUWSTOP by comprler
STOP
* 1 : W h n tho CPU is in RUN mode ud Yo040 is off. the CPU r m u i m in RUN mode if c h v g . d lo PAUSE m o d . . DW16
t : Main program (RAM) 2 : Subomarm IRAW
0 : Main program ( R W )
IndicUom which s q w n c e program la run pmently. One v d w d 0 to 2 is stond in BIN code (2 ia only valid for tho
AW-F.)
00017 DWl8
Sun Sun
tim tim
run t i m is s b r d into Dm17 in BIN cod.. Sun t i m i s t o r d in BIN code at u c h END and dwaya s mritlm.
If . t i m is smller than the content of D0017. the walw k M m r l y s t o r d at u c h END. N m l y . the minimum value of
1-29
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT AISERIES SYSTEMS

Dncrlptkn
Sun t i m Muirmrn s ~ u l tim (per 10 m u ) Constant s u n t i m So4 by wo in 10 ( m u increments) A CPUS l
MELSEC-A
ApplbMe CAI
1 lo 61
A X C P U ud AXCPUC24(PRF)
*Stores the y r r (2 l o n r d m ) and m t h in BCD.

Clock dala
stores t h e day and hour in BCD
Clock data (Day.hour)
Clock &a (Minute.rrcond)
E x o p t for AXCPU. AXCPUC24(PRF) and AOJ2HCPU
0 Wlt b. wt
Clock data
Saturday
Sets anribute of eaoh remote terrnind module connected to Ax with 0 or 1 a each bit t 0 : Conforms lo the Mitrubtshi slandard protocol 1: No-protocd made of AJ35PTF-R2 DI(a configuntion
A n r i b t o of nmote
0:
t :
terminal module
Mikubihi standard wolocoi

No~rolocol
D9035
A X C P U and AXCPUC24(PRF)
1-30
I . GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT A-SERIES SYSTEMS

Dhih
Extomion t i
ngmtu
MELSEC-A
LnACPU-F U C C P U and 42CCPUC24PRF)
Used blodc numbr

1 toe4
T d dn u d r d stations
Tk. bkdc nu+ of t h cunontly utilized oxtonsion f i b mgistw is stond in BIN d o . b 5 . a tho tot4 numbr of smiaa ( 1 to W) of VO modula .nd brmind modukrmmd to A x . n b n Doaignatestho d w i n numbu of an axtonsion tk r q i s t w I r W o i which data is r d w i i l t o n to D m and DW37 u a BIN vduo.
B
m( a .
b i g n a t e s tho sorid n u m k r from tho RO of block No.1 to tho d w i x n w r k r r o p r d l n a tho block number. of Extonsion fila rogistw
AMCPU-F
For -ion f i b rogistw dv . b numkr M iion
1638 16244
Priwity 1 to 4
LED
indktkn priority
AnACPU-F. AXCPU, AXCPUCPI(PRF) and AlSCPU
For d h b . &or to tho A X C P U Usw's Manual
true
For s w i n g
To 0p.mo smpling t r w o [STRA] or [STRAR] by turning OWOFF M w by priphrd tho v d w stored in DSCU b used u a mdio tor s v r p l i n g t n t . . sun : 0 T i m : T i m (p( to m u ) Valw is stored in BIN eod. into D M s t od.nuof onon o~euned tho SFC program in BIN in
d.vi.
cd. o.
SFC program onor 40
0 : No wmr 80 : SFC progrun parmelor enw 81 : SFC ccdo .nor 82 : Numbn of shpr d sinwk.n.ous oxaulion oxcuded 83:BkdcsWwtoc 84 : SFC program w a t i o n orror (For W h . rdw to s u t i o n 7)
All CPUs
m r oecumd o
Bloc& n u n h r in which an
Stwn tho block nuin whieh an onor occurred In tho SFC program in BIN c d In tho cuo d uo 83. tho s l a i n g block o. rr
Stop nu-r in which M . n o r occund
DW54
DWSS
Enor
s.qumm stop
n u w r is stored. Stores tho stop numbor in rrhich omr 93 occurred tn tho SFC m r a m in BIN ccda. SLWn 'Q whon u r w r 80.81.01 82 ocarrrsd. Stom tho block starting r(.p nu- *rh.n onor 83 o c a r r d . $ t o r n tho transition n u m k r in which error 84 m u w e d in tho SFC pmqrun in BIN code. S t o m T when u r o m 8 0 , 81, 8 2 , or 83 occurred. Storn t h o uquonco step n u m k r d t m a i t i o n and oporation output in which onor 84 o o c u r d in tho SFC pmgrm in BIN cod..
Stores the stop numbn h
Status latch st- n u m k r
n s1.tus Mch is o x c u t o d
AnACPU-F
0 : Nomul Communica1 Initid daa tion wmr code 2 : Line ormr a n a :
S t o r a owor cod. whon Yo081 is turnod ON (oomnunicalion with VO modules or -r terminal modulr fails). 1 ....,Total numkr d stations of I/O mdn or romota torou l minal modulr or numbu of r a r i r is no( n o m l . In. itial program conbins an onor 2 .,... c.bk b r d q o or powor smly of 1 1 0 modules or remota tormind modukr is turnod off
A2CCPU and AXCPUC24(PRF)
PC corn muniaion chock
Data CW by W71C24(S3)
Numkr d communicaiion
nqunts
In t h o kopb+dc test mod. of individual AJ7tC24(S3). the AJ71C24(S3) autorruticdly OXOCutn data w r l t d r u d and communicationc h d .
Stores tho n u m k r 01 wmmunicatlon roquostr o x u u t d to ramoto terminal modules eannctod to W71PT32(S3) or * x C P U . Subtractr 1 at completion of communicationwith a remote terminal module Slores the final statlon n u m k r of UO modulos and ramote tormirul modula c o m u t d to A x .
AI1 CPUs
oxocuted to n o mt . t0hlUl
d U k S
0 to 32
AnACPU-F. A X C P U and AXCPUC24(PRF)
Find Final c a n n c t d station cannchd statlon nuntm n u d m
A X C P U and A2CCPUC24(PRF)
1-31
1. GENERAL INFORMATIONABOUT A-SERIES SYSTEMS
MELSEC-A
E x W for AnACPU-F D.pnds om cach miaoconpulor package Instruction error ddail nu* Channgd VO moduk hud addmas .Storm
M imtrudion error
dotail lactor incode
AnACPU-F
~~ ~
* S t # r uppr 2 digits 01 tho hud Yo d d m s of VO modukr to be kdd or u n M during D ln mod. in BIN c o d e . ni Exunpl.: I n p u t modulo m+ w
*Oucpuc moduk numbrn (in unib of 16 poinls), of which f w a h v o are m in bit p a t t u n . ( P m d ouipui unit numbns wtmn o d puuwtw s W n g has beon podonnod)
bbm.
1 ~ 1 4 1 a 1 z ! 1 1 0 0 8
moduk
Fuse blow
D O I W O 0 0J.O Delol!co
0OlO;'b
O:bO
0 0 0 0 0
0
0 0
0
O.l,O
0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0
* !
0 0 0 0 0
01-
AnNCPU-F and AnACPU-F
'Hn s 1 . I ~o r o d i
a l d . c k v is nc( prtorm6d. Themlore. it is ,.quimd l o p r l o n n c b u by UIW program.)

Tho O u W l moduk n u m k r in tho fwo bbwn stat0 h enlored in the bit paltun.
b l5 )91W 0
to
bBb7bsb5b4Ub2blbO
0
IIIII
Tho modulo which is set to solllng switch 0
Fuso b l o w
module
Bit paltorn of fuse b l a

modUk0
The modulm which is sot to sating switch 7 or exknsion b u o modulo d d 3
Fixd lo T
Th.modukrrhichis 1 sol l o salting sritch 6 or ~xtwbn u o modb u k slat 2
111
1,
8
Tho modulo *hi& is sa lo sdlingswitch 2
Tho modulo which is sol to sollinp r n t c h 1. '
4OJ2HCPU
Tho modulo which ir s# to wnim S w i W 5 or oxtonsior-base modulo s b ling l1
Tho module which m sa to sot.
Tho modulo which is H to ( sfling switch 3
switch 4 or oxtontion b u e modulo slot 0
Output moduk n u m k n ( i n units of 16 poinlr) whoso lusw u blown . or whoso ohma1 p o r n r supply is of( are ontored in bit p.nornr. (Whon puamoler sating has k n perlormd tho sol I/O modub . nufr&r is ontorod.) 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 10 9 DWW 0
0 0 ;
0
Fuse blown modulo
Tho bil panern in untts 01 16 points of fuse blown

modUkr
7
0
5 4
3 2
t u. Indicata I s b l o m slatus
0 0
01010 0 0 0 0
AlSCPU
(When tho normal slalua has b a n nrlorod, thk will no1 be chard. Thorelow, k i n g m bel done b ( . user's prognm.) a h
1-32
MELSEC-A
02
5.tr v d u for tho s(.p l n n h r monitoring t i r m and tho nu* which t w m on rh.n tk.monitoring t i m r t i & out.
b0
Do110
M b7 I
dF
bo
-2
Doll1
411 CPUl
-2
Dall2 Slap transfer mitoting limw i n g (fofMQI 13)
Slap tramfor mi(oring limr sdng (forM9114)
15141S12l110S 8
vo module v r i f y onof
Bit in unihof 18 poina of w* owof units
DO116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D 0 1 1 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ b 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0a :
hNCPU-F and AnACPU-F
09123
D9116
VO modulo verily error

Thomodukwhkhis sat to sdting s r i k h 6 or oxtonsion b o modd o rbt 2
111
The modulo which la set l o rolling rmilch 2
4OJ2HCPU
1.
Tho moduk h i o h is sol lo Baing aritch 5 or oxlension base moduk slot 1
Tho modulo whlch is 801 to s d n g rwilch 3 Tho modulo rrhieh IS aet to sob ling rrrtch 4 or oxlomion bru modulo $ d 0 I
1-33
W116
1
MELSEC-A
b-bk
CW
Whm
modulo numb.r(in unib of 16 p o i n h ) is ontorod. p h o n p u u r r ( e r salting has boon poriommd, th.8 1 . n u m k r is entered.) Bit p a e m in u n b of 16 poitda d a rrify .not module 1514131211109 8 D 9 ~ 1 8 ~ 0 ~ 0 ~
7
d r 110 d f r o r n h VO moduk infomution t h i h u h rogi8twbd rrh.n tho po*n supply H l u m d ON is d.laM, I tho VO
VO modulo
5 4 ~ ~
3 12
~
U I
1ndiUl.r
VO module verily error
4lSCPU ~ 0 ~
DO124
~ W h o n m d FO lo 255 is turnod ON by [OUT f] or [SET Fl, 1 is o d d to the conhnh d 09124. Whon p S T F] or [LEDR] d
(Whon the normal s1aIu1 hu b..n r n t o n d . this is nol c k . n d . Thudom. d u r i n g must k done by t h o users p1Oor.m.)
09126 D9125 D9127 D9128 D9129 D9130 DS131 -
hnuncillor ddaion numkr
When OM of FO to 255 is turnod ON by [OUT f] o [SET q , n u n r F k r . which haa tu& O N , is onlord into D 9 1 2 5 to D9132 in due order in BIN d e . f n u n h r , which has k . n tumd OFF by F S T fl, ia e r a s d from 09125 to D9132. and tho contents of data ngiaten sucewding t h e d a h rogister. h e r e the u d F numkr w u 8 1 O r d am shined to th. s d i n g d.1. rogirbn. By exmculing [LEDRJ instruction. tho eartomb d 09125 Lo 09132 are shiRd upward by one. (for it CUI k pr(ormd by use of INDICATOR RESETswitch . on Iront of CPU modulo) W h m thne u 8 annunciator detations, tho Slh o w is not s b n d into 09125to 9132 w e n if d e t e c t e d .
a l . instruction it u u d 1 is subtracted from tho contents of D9124. (tl tho INDICATOR RESETswiich is provided lo the CPU, p.rsmg mpromssing) Quantity. h i c h h u the swilch can u a u t e the . p r F] or P T F) is s l o r d into D9124 in BIN V E k . n t u r d ON code. Tho v a l u at W124 ir nuximum 6.
A3N.
411 CPUS
%
DoQ# DO123
fF
fg % ? ! % k
st%
?% z
LEW
w124 WlzD 00127 DO128

DO129
09132
DO150
D9133 09134
wmt
D9135 09136 09137 D9138
00 : No UO moduloor
runo(e t m i n a l module w initial comrmniuti impwsible 01 : Input module or rwm(e luminal
St0r.r inlormalion d UO moduhs and remote lermlnd modules connuied to tho A X corresponding to st.(iar nurrbr. Informalion of 10 modules and nmote IermiNl moduloa ia for input, 1 and remole tumind modulo idenliftcation and expressed as 2bit data. 00 : No VO module o rotmte termiml module or initlal comrnuniu f tion is inporsble 01 : Input module or remote lermtnal module 10 : output module Data configuration
AXCPU and AXCPUC24(PRF)
10 : Oulput module
W d U k
b l l b l l b13
b12
blt blO b0 M b7 M
bl
M b3b2
bl bO
D9140
D9139
1-34
MELSEC-A
D9142
Stdion 6
stdim 3
.. ..
Odd nu+ stations (sldion 1 , 3, 5. ... 61,63) : W lo b7 (n 0) 7 E m numkc s w i w (station 2.4, 6. 8 ... 6 2 , 6 4 ) : b8 to b15 (n 8 )
n n dotornid b swim numkr d VO modub or rey M e luminal modula.
Mod. setting
sming of the
n u m k r of r0tri.s
09175
Line enor r.l!y m n l a r
N u m k r oi ratria
W h n M VO module or 8 r a m i e terminal d u b c a u s d communiurion error, Hn s w i m is p offline. C m m n i c l t i o n with m d l I swims is wmlinud. W b n a feutiy station r d u m d l o normal, comrmniutiin is m u & 8 u t O m d i a l l Y . W h n M VO d u b or a r d a Imninal modulo uusad communicdion error, Hn station is p offline. Communicationwith n o d d l s l d h is cenlinued *Though alaully slrtion mtumd n m l , 10 ComTIUnidion 18 not restored unless the stdion modub is r w l u l o d W h n an VO module or a remota Iarmirul modub u d communidion error, comrmniaiion with all 8ldiOnS is st+. Though a fully slation m t u m d to nomul. communiulion is no1 restored unless the stalian modub is r w t 8 f l d . Checks hardwue 8nd connocling u l s of VO be modukr M d remde IermiMl modUlbS. If nre e x u u ( d lo I/O moduba and n m l e li s terminal moduk. hhu u s d camrnunicdion error. c i .Sots for 5 t i m al D a r on. S o 1 rmga: 0 lo 32 li c a r n u n i d i o n with an 10 modub or a remote terminal moduk is 1 no( r a b n d to n o r m 8 1 afler s# n u m k r of reltios, such modula b wudd 8 s a faulty stdim. Storm the n u d r of rolriu exocutd at lim w r (lim o out). D.1. b.comr 0 when line is r n t o r d lo norm1 and communication
1-35
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUTASERIES SYSTEMS
MELSEC-A
Error cod.is c * u d in lhe folbrring cases. W h the RUN k y switch is w from STOP l o RUN. e d (DSlBO to Dol83 u o dl c b d ) W h Yn4 ol u c h romolo tumid is 1 1 from OFF 10 ON. . Bit which x msponds lo fautty VO moduk or romole lwminai modulo is s (1). 4 . it whlch corrupondr In a IwHy shlion is sot *h.n normal canmunirdon unnotbe m l o r d eftor ox.d i n g tho n u n h r of mri.. s a D9174. a1 It automatic onlino r a u m ia erubkd. bit which corresponds to a Iaulty amion is r-01 (0) when the rtrtion is mtored to normal.
Axcpu AXCPUC24(PRF)
Data eonfiguntia,
1-36
1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT .A-SERIESSYSTEMS

'OINTS
MELSEC-A
(1) Special registers are cleared when the PC is switched OFF or the RESET switch is set to LATCH CLEAR or RESET. Data remains unchanged when the RUN key switch is set to STOP.
(2) Special registers marked '1 above are latched and their data will remain unchanged after normal status is restored. Therefore, use the method as shown below to clear the data.
1) Method by user program Insert the circuitshown at right program the into and turn ON the clear execution command contact to clear the contentsof register.
~~~
H6 i "
RSTl ldpppe
Opri.l*ncbnr*
*ubtod..nd
2) Method by peripheral device Set the register to "0" by changing the present value the test by function of peripheral device or set to "0"by forced reset. For the operation procedure, refer to the Instruction Manual for peripheral device.
3) By moving the RESET key switch at the CPU front to the RESET position, the special register isset to "0". (3) Data is written to special registers marked'2 above in the sequence program.
(4) Data is written to special registers marked *3 above in test mode of the peripheral device.
1-37

1.4
MELSEC-A
110 ConnectionTroubleshooting
This section explains possible problems with I/O circuits.
1.4.1
Input circuit troubleshooting
This section describes possible problems with input circuits, and corrective actions.
b Condition
Input signal Ixample 1 h a s not turn 3FF.
Input Circuit Problems and Corrective Actions

C a w
Leakage current of input switch (such as drive by non-contactwltch).
1
Conoctiva Action Connect an appropriate register which wl make the voltage across the il terminals of the input module lower than the OFF voltage value. AC input
AC input Input module Power supply AC input
---'
a < d u l eInput
-I
It isrecommended to use 0.1 to 0.47 pF + 47 to 120 Q (112 W) for the constant of CR. Same as Example 1. Or make up another independent display circuit. I
1 1
Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp.
Input signal ixample 2 does not turn OFF. supply

1
Input module
Leakage current due to line capacity of wiring cable. Line capacity C of twisted pair wire is approx. 100 PFlm(39.37 inches). AC input
Input signal ixample 3 does not turn OFF.
Same as Example 1. However, leakage current is not generated when power supply is located on the inputequipment side as shown below. AC input
-supply
b
module
&
-I
I
Input module
--
Power
Drive by switch with LED indicator.
DC input (sink) Input signal Zxample 4 does not turn OFF. Input module
Connect a register which will make the voltage across input module terminal and common higher than the OFF voltage, as shown below. DC input (sink) Resistor Input module
I
1-38
The calculation example of connected resistor value is shown in the following page.
1. GENERAL INFORMATIONABOUT A-SERIES SYSTEMS
MELSEC-A
Input Circuit Problemsand Corrective Actions (Continue)

Condition
C8-e
Sneak path due to the use of two power supplies.
Corrective Action
Uw only one power supply. Connect a sneak path prevention diode. (Figure below)
Input signal Example 5 does not turn OFF.
Calculation example for Example 4
--
Ax40 module In ut
' current 4 mA
["
-A
:,:2.4 kQ
The switch with the LED indicator is connected to AX40 and there is4 mA leakage a cur-
The voltage VTB across terminal and common is obtained using the following formula:
VTB = 4 [mA] x 2.4 [kQ] = 9.6 [VI (The voltage drop of the LED is ignored.)
Since this voltagedoes not satisfy the OFF voltage of 6 [VI or lower, the input signal does not turn off. Therefore, connect a resistor as shown below.
Calculate the resistor value R, as shown below: For an input voltage c 6 V, current 1 must be: (24 - 6 [VI)
+ 3.6[kQ] =
5 mA
Resistor R must be selected to give a current of 1 > 5 mA.
1-39

Hence, for resistor, R
MELSEC-A
6 [VI + R > 5 [mA] 6 [V]/2.4 6 [VI + 2.5 [mA] > R 2.4 [WZ] > R
[kn]
For R = 2 [kn], the power capacity must be: W = (applied voltage)2 /R (or W = (maximum current)2 x R) Resistor R terminal voltage is:
2*4 lKR1 x 2 : 2.4 + X = 5.58 [VI
2.4 x 2 2.4 + 2
* +3.6 [KR] = X : 24 [VI
Therefore, the power capacity W of resistor R is W = (5.58

0.5 to 1 W.
/2 [kn] = 0.015 [W]
Use a safety factor of 3 to 5 . The resistor should therefore be rated at
A 3 kf2, 0.5 to 1 W resistor should therefore be connected across the relevant input terminal and its COM.
1-40

1.4.2
MELSEC-A
Output circuit failures and conactiveactions

Conditlon
c
Cause
~~~~~~ ~~~~
Output Circuit Failure8 and Corrective Actions

Corroctive Action
n
Load is half-wave rectified inside (Seen In some solenoids).

AY22,AY23
Connect a resistor of several 10 kR to several hundred ka across the load.
When the output is OFF, Example 1 excessive voltage is applied to the load.
pose a problem to the output element. But it may cause the diode, which is built in the load, to deteriorate, resulting In a fire, etc.
If a resistor is used in this way, it does n o t
When the polarity of the power supply is as shown in [ l ] , C is charged. When the polarity is as shown in [2], the voltage charged in C plus the line voltage are applied across D l . Max. voltage is approx. 2.8E. Leakage current due to built-in noise suppression
AY22, AY23
L5zT
Resistor
~ ~~
The load does ixample 2 not turn OFF (triac output).
Connect C and R across the load. When the wiring distance from the output card to the load is long, there may be a leakage current due to the line capacity.
module
~~~
~~
After driving the relay, drive the C-R type timer by the same contact.
Some timers have half-wave rectified internal circuits. Therefore, take the precautions indicated in the example.
When the load is a C-R type timer, Example 3 lime constant fluctuates [triac output).
AY22, AY23
output
Sneak path due to the use of two power supplies.

AY40, 41, 42
OM.
Reduce the power supplies form two to
ixample 4
,oad does not urn OFF. :For direct :urrent)
* Connect a sneak path prevention diode. When the load is a relay or similar device, t is necessary to connect reverse-voltage absorbing diode to the load. (Shown by the jotted l i n e in the figure at left)
When E1 c EP, snake path occurs.
1-41
2. COMMON ITEMS OF SPECIAL-FUNCTION MODULES

2.
MELSEC-A
COMMON ITEMS OFSPECIAL-FUNCTIONMODULES

Details about analog-to-digital conversionmodules and digital-to-analog conversion modules are given in Section 3. Section 4 gives details about high-speed counter module troubleshooting. In addition, thereare many other different kindsof special-function modules. This section explains the common items that should be known do to troubleshooting of special-function modules.
2.1
Special-Function Modules Special-function modules are designed to execute functions which canno; be done by a PC CPU or functions whose applications are limited. The principal special-function modules are as follows: (1) Analog-to-digital conversion An analog (*lo V, 4 to 20 mA) is input. (2) Digital-to-analog conversion An analog (+-io V, 4 to 20 mA) is output.
(3) High-speed counter

High-speed pulses, encoders, etc. are input. (4) Positioning High-speed pulses are output to a positioning servo amplifier. (5) Graphic controllers Graphics are monitored on CRT, LCD, and plasma display screens.
(6) RS-232C, RS-422, and parallel interfaces
Data links are executed by connecting other computers, a printers, bar code readers, ID plates, etc.
(7)Audio output
Audio recorded by using a microphone is announced from the speaker when necessary.
( 8 ) External fault diagnosis
Diagnoses whether or not input signals and external output signals are operating correctly. If there is a malfunction, it is detected.
2-1
2. COMMON ITEMSOF SPECIAL-FUNCTION MODULES

22
MELSEC-A
Relationship Between PC CPUs and Special-Function Modules Special-function modules have a buffer memory and can store necessary data to the buffer memory. A PC CPU can write data to a buffer memory by using a TO instruction and can read data from the buffer memory by using a FROM instruction from the buffer memory as necessary. When a command is sent from a PC CPU to a special-function module, output signal Y goes ON and OFF. When a special-function module returns a response to the PC CPU, input signal X goes ON and OFF.
%%&
Power
CPU module
110
module
Specialfunction module module
The User's Manual of the applicable special-function module give details about I/O signal and buffer memory allocations.
2.3
Buffer Monitoring and Forcible Changing of Current Values by Using Peripheral Devices Current values can be checked by directly monitoring a buffermemory using an AGGPP or AGPHP (SW4GP-GPPA).
(1) Monitoring operationkurrent value change operation by AGGPP
;~LCJ~~~NITORING (SPECEAL FUNCTION UNIT BUFFER
2. COMMON ITEMS OF SPECIAL-FUNCTION MODULES
MELSEC-A
VO No. 08
%ATCH YONITORINQ (SPECIAL FUNCTION UNIT
BUFFER YEYORY)'
ADDRESS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 0
0
ADDRESS
16 17 18 19
0
0 0 0 0
500 7 8 7 8
t
0 0
X)
21
xy)
7 5 1 0
ADDRESS 32 33
5
1
35
P
26 -~
0 7 8
0 0
7
37 38 .~
40 41 A2 43 U 45
36
39
0 0 0
0 0
0
0
0 0 0 0
27
31
29
29
0 6
30
4s
47
2-3
3. A-D, D-A CONVERSION MODULES

3.
MELSEC-A
A-D, D-A CONVERSION MODULES

This section explains the error descriptions and troubleshooting which can occur when analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog modules are used.
3.1
3.1.1
AOJ2-68AD,A68AD Analog-to-DigitalConversionModule
Write date emr code list
The following three errors occur during the write operation number may of the of channels, averaging processing specification, averaging time, and averagin count. The numeric value of the error code enclosed in [ ] indecates the channel number for which the error has occurred.
Types of Write Data Error Codes
Description
I
o1
Error Cod;'
I I
(1) [ ]
A value other than 0 to 8 has been set as the number of channels.

been set asan averaging time set value.
A value other than 20 to 10000 ms has
A value other than 1 to 4000 times has been set asan averaging count set value.
11-
'OINTS I
1and [ ] F write data error codeare used only to ] of make differentiation between averaging timeand averaging count, respectively. The individual numerals do not have any significance.
'2
(2) When an error has occurred, check thewrite data error code, reset the error code, and then write the corrected data. (Referto Section 3.4.2 on page 3-13.) Example:
(1) Error code 32 has occurred
Since the averaging timeof channel 3 is wrong, change the value to within the range 20 to 10000ms. (2) Error code 88 has occurred Since the averagingcount of channel 8 is wrong, change the valu to within the range 1 to 4000 times.
'1 Error codes are stored in binary in buffer memory address 34. a) When data is written from a PC CPU, analog-to-digital conversionmodule checks the the data ranges of the number of used channels, the average number of times, and 1 time only averages. when data is outside a range, error codes are 16 bit binary. b) Error codes can be reset by writing 0 from the PC CPU.
(Note)
3-1
MELSEC-A
c) When several error codes occur, the writing data error which was found first by an analog-to-digital conversion module is stored. Subsequsnt errors not stored. are d) If an error is reset without correcting that error, the writing data errorcode becomes 0 , and RUN LED of an analog-to-digital conversion module stops flickering and goes ON.
'2 The error code I read by using a FROM instruction. s Error reset is executed with theprogram from the PC CPU by using a TO instruction. a) When an error code is read to 03
Error cede nd
l TY $ O I E - &R M '
Enor cod.
READY s i g d , In t h . u s e of dot 0
b) When an error code is reset

m*
HO
An error code is read to D3.
ii
TO
I address 34,toand the memory 0 is mitten buffer error

code is reset.
3.1.2
Troubleshooting f b w chart
Error
I
Section 3.1.3 'Flow chart used when 'RUN' LED has flickered'
converter module
.Section 3.1.4used when 'RUN' Flow chart
LED
has off' turned
value cannot be
YES
Section 3.1 .S 'Flow chart used when digital output value cannot be read'
3.1.6 ' :ection chart used when data, such as the number of channels, Flow cannot be mitten'
3-2
3. A-D, D-A CONVERSION MODULES ....

.
,
MELSEC-A
3.1.3
F k w chart w)8d when " R U N LED has flkkered

'RUN' LED flickers.
Read write data error code from buffer memory.
I
YES
9
Channel setting error
Check the number of channels. Compare this with t h e number of channels designated in Buffer Address 1.
S ti g error of averaging et n NO time or averaging count
, Please return the unitto the nearest sales representative together with details of trouble.
&
YES Check write data. Check if averaging time or averaging count has been set before averaging processingis specified.

3.1.4
MELSEC-A
Flow chart used when "RUN" LED has turned off

'RUN' LED
1 and 3?
;"
l...T
Open the circuit across terminals test
'RUN' LED
Recheck by loading and unloading the AD converter module.
u
Respecify power used.
supply
un
Please return the unit to the nearest sales representative together with details of trouble.
3-4

3.1.5
MELSEC-A
F k w chart used when digital output value cannot be read
Read any error step number with perpheral device.
Monitor 09008 by use of peripheral device. AD converter module failure YES
Check if the condition for executing FROM instruction is on.
1
Check if the address of buffer memory in the FROM instruction is the address of channel from which data will be read.
1 Check the I 0 number of AD converter module and the I/O number of FROM instruction.
Read and chedi the setting number of channels for which A/D conversion will be made.
l l
Check the stage setting switch of unit. extension base
Check the wiring method for analog input (voltage or current) of AD converter mod-
Check if offsewgain setting is proper.
1
Base unit failure
Disconnect the wiring of analog input of AD converter module, input voltage by use of stabilizing power or battery, and monitor digital output value.
YES
Base unit is normal AD converter module Please return the unit to the near-
1
I
1
I I
AD converter module failure NO
External wiring is affected by noise. Examine grounding method.
MELSEC-A
IREMARK]
The following contentsare written into D9008 when an error has occurred during execution of the FROM or TO instruction to the AD converter module.
Content (BIN value) of Special Register D9008
CPU Status
Error and Cause

FROM and TO instnrctions cannot be executed. Hardware failure of AD converter module (special function unit), CPU unit, or base unit. When the FROM or TO instruction has been executed, access has been made to the special function unit but no answer is returned. The accessed AD converter module (special function unit) has failed. Access has been made (FROM or TO instruction has beenexecuted) to a slot where the AD converter module (special function unit) is not loaded. The content of FROM or TO instruction is incorrect or the stage number setting of extension base unit is incorrect.
40
stop
41
stop
46
stop
Continuous operation can be performed by the setting of parameter.
3-6

3.1.6
MELSEC-A
Fkw chart used when data, such as the number of channdr,cannot be written
The number of channels cannot be written.
Read any error step number with perphrral device.
YES
Monitor 09008 by use of periphera1 device.
D9008 is 40.
NO
YES
AD converter module failure

YES
CPU unit is failure

NO
NO
DM08 is 46.
Check the I/O number of AD converter module and the 10 number 1 of TO instruction.
IYES
AD converter module failure Please return the unit to the nearest sales representative together with details of trouble.
Check the stage setting switch of extension base unit.
3-7

39
3.2.1
A68ADC Analog-to-DigitalConversionUnit
MELSEC-A
Error code ls it
If an error has occurredwhen data is written to the A68ADC (the RUN LED flickers), any of the errorcodes mentioned in the list below is stored in buffer memory at address 18. When the APCCPU is usesd, the same error code is stored also in special registers 09180 to D9193. When the AJ71 PT32-S3 is used, the same error code is stored also in buffer memory at addresses 196 to 209.
Error Code
(Read error)
Cause
Designated head address is out of buffer memory. Designated range of read words includes addresses out of buffer memorv. Designated head address is out of buffer memory. Designated range of write words includes addressesout of buffer memory. Write was attempted to read-only areas.
Corroctivo Action
Correct data which designates range out of buffer memory.
(Write error)
Correct data which designates range out of buffer memory. Correct data which designates range readonly areas. Correct command code. Correct the read execution instructionto disable data transmission. Set word length '1' or over. at Match the number of words of command data with that of the data. Correct averaging time setting in 20 to 10000 msec range.
Command code other than read(1) or write (2) is received. Data was received immediately after read command (1). Read andwrite word length is set at .Om. The number of words set by write ccrmmand data differs from that of received data. Averaging time is set out of 20 to 10000 msec range. [ ] indicates the channel in which the error _ 1 []mj _occurred. Numbers do not have meaning, but indicate an averagingtime error. Averaging count is set out of 1 to 4000 counts. I 1 indicates the channelin which the error occurred. 1 Numbers do not have meaning, but indicate an avsraaina counterror.
1-
[ ] P I
Correct averaging count setting in 1 to 4000 counts range.
(a) If two or more errors occur continuously, the error codefor the first error is stored, and following error codes are not stored.
(b) Errorcode reset is doneby writing "0" to address 18 of buffer

memory. (Figures other than 0 are ignored.)
3-a
MELSEC-A
When the AJ71PT32-S3 i used, error codes for the errors occur during s communication with remore terminal modules are stored in buffer memory at addresses 196 to 209 in addition to the error codes for errors detected by the A68ADC.
Error Code
1
Emor Name
Set data error
C8UW
Cortoctive Action the data.

Reset faulty remote terminal module. Turn OFF and then ON the power. If the above procedures do not recover the system, the system hardwrre is faulty. Please consult Mitsubishi rewesentative.
Data to written t h e remote terminal transmission areas includes errors.
WDT error
Remote terminal module malfunction.
8
9
Transmission area setting error Communication error
Remote terminal transmission area set range is smaller than the number of words used by remote terminal modules. Communication between the master module and remote terminal modules is faulty.
~ ~~
number of words used by remote terminal modules. Noise or remote terminal module failure. Correct initial setting data so that the set range is larger than the number of words used by remote terminal modules.
the set range is larger than the
Correct Initial setting data so that
Receive area setting enor
Remote terminal receive area set range is smaller than the number of words used by remote terminal modules.
3-9
3. A-D, 0-A CONVERSION MODULES

322 ..
When the RUN LED flickers o turned OFF f
(1) When flickers:
MELSEC-A
I I
Check Point Corrective Action write or read

.I_
Data which disables
is
Refer to the List of Error Codes (Section cause. the 3.2.1) for and correct the
I
I
(2) When turned OFF:

Check Point
24 VDC power supply is turned on.
Corrective Action Make sure the power supply. Adjust the voltage within 15.6 to 31.2 V range. Add a loop to turn ON the MINI-SI link communication start signal Y(" + 28) to the sequence program. Reset the PC CPU, and start them in the same manner. If error code '6' is again stored, the system hardware may be faulty. Please consult Mitsubishi representative.
24 VDC power supply voltage is within the set range.

If the MINI-S3 link is connected, the MINIS3link communication start signal + 28) is turned ON.
If the MINI-S3 link is connected, error code '6' may b stored in the master module e buffer memory at address 196 to 209.
If the MINI-S3 link is connected, error codes '9' and '10' may be stored in the master module buffer memory at address 196 to 209.
3.2.3
Reset the PC CPU, and start them in the same manner. If error codes '9' and '10' are again stored, the system hardware may be fault. Please consult Mitsubishi representative. Check the cables. After offsevgain setting, open the TEST terminals.
Data link cables are normal.
The TEST terminals are open.
When the LINK RUN LED turned OFF or the LINK ERR. LED turned ON
Corrective
Action
I The RUN LED turned OFF.
I The RUN LED is flickerina.
Point
Check
I Follow Section 3.2.2 (1). 1 Follow Section 3.2.2 (2).
I I
3 - 10

3.2.4
MELSEC-A
When read of digital output values is impossible

Check Point
The RUN LED is flickering or turned OFF. The ERROR LED of the CPU module is flickering or turned ON. The RUN LED of the CPU module is flickerimr or turned OFF. When A2CCPU i s used:
r
Corroctive Action
Follow Section 3.2.2.
Refer to the User's Manual for respective CPU module for error content. Refer to the User's Manual for respective CPU module for error content.
the
TspE (normal) "u f: LED flickering.

Of
Refer to the A2CCPU User's Manual for error Set the sequence program to turn ON the MINI-SI link communication start signal. Refer to the AJ71 PT32-S3 User's Manual for error content. Refer to the AJ71PT3243 User's Manual for error content' Locate trouble by checking the signal lines visually and for continuity.
The MINI433 link communication start + 28) is signal tumed ON.

The RUN LED Of the master module is turned OFF.
z$-s3 is
The RD'SD LED Of the master module is flickerino. (normal)
Analog input signal lines are broken or disconnected.
3 - 11

3.3
AlS64AD Analog-to-Digital Conversion Module
MELSEC-A
Assorted problem conditions and a troubleshooting guide for theAlS64AD are described below.
331 ..
Error code list

When data is written to an AlS64AD from a PC CPU or an error occurs by reading data (RUN LED of AlS64AD flashes), the following error codes are stored in address 18 of the A1 SMAD buffer memory.
Error Code List(Detected with AlS64AD)

Error Cbde Cause Corrective Action
100 102
Wrong number (other than 1 to 3) was set to the resolution. Data was written to the read-only area (addresses 10 to 13). area.
Set the resolution to either 1, 2,

Modify the specified placefor the read-only
&t the average time within 80 to
[IO
A value outside 80 to 1 O O msec OO was set for the average time. [ ] indicates the channel No. in which an error occurred. A value outside 1 to 500 times was s e t for the average count. [ ] indicates the channel No. in which an error occurred.
I
I
10000 msec.
115
S e t the average count within1 to
500 times.
(1) When several errors occur, the error code that occurred first is stored, and any errors after that are not stored. (2) The error code is reset by turning ON Y12 with a sequence program.
3-12

3.3.2 TrwMeshooting
MELSEC-A
The following explainsthe simple troubleshooting for AlS64AD. Refer to the CPU Module User's Manual for a PC CPU module. (1) When the RUN LED of AlS64AD flashes
Items to Check
Is the data which cannotbe executed read/write written to A1 S64AD?
Corrective Actions
Confirm the error cause with the error code list in Section 3.3.1, and correct the sequence program.
(2) When the RUN LED of AlS64AD goes OFF

I t m s to Chock Correctivr Actions
Are the TEST terminals opened? Make offsevgain adjustments, and open the TEST terminals.
~
ICX0 (WDT error) set?
Reset the PC CPU. If the RUN LED is not turned ON after resetting a PC CPU, there may be a hardware malfunctionin the module.
(3) When the digital output value cannot be read

Items to Chock Corrective
Actions
Follow the procedures in above (1) or (2). Check the error description according to the CPU User's Manual. Check the error description listed in the CPU User's Manual.
Is the RUN LED of AlS64ADflashing or turned OFF?

Is the ERROR LED of the CPU is turned ON?
Is the RUN LEDof the CPU flashing or turned OFF?
Does the address of the bufler memory specifiedwith a FROM instruction correspond tothe address of the digital output value of channel to be read?
Check the sequence program.
Is the channel specified with FROM instruction set to Read the buffer memory address 0 and verify whether it A-D conversion enable? is set to conversion enable or disable.
Is the conversion completed in the channel specified with FROM instruction?

Is the analog input signal line disconnected, or does an error occur?
Read the buffer memory address 19 and verify the conversion completed flag. Confirm the error by visually checking or conduction checking the signal line.
Disconnect the analog input wire of AlS64AD, and apply If the digital output value is normal with an AlS64AD, the test voltage to the terminal of this module to measure the module is affected by noise with external wiring. the digital output value. Therefore, check the wiring and grounding method.
3 - 13

3.4
3.4.1
MELSEC-A
Nomenclature
N A D
ABBAD
Test mode terminalsl 1 Prior to offsewgain setting, connect together terminals 1 and 3 .
r\\,
1
Unit fixing hook Hook for fixing t h e A68AD to the base unit
RUN LED
Indicates the operating status of A68AD. (Normal mode) ON: During normal operation Flicker: At write data erroror A68AD hardware error OFF: 5 V power off or watch dog timer error (Test mode) ON:When the OFFSET switch or GAIN switch is located at the ON position. OFF: When both the OFFSET switch or GAIN switch is located at the OFF position.
CHANNEL select switch1
Used to select a channel for the offset adjustment and gain adjustment. (No processing at pisitions 0 and 9.)
OFFSET switch] At the ON position, stores the applied analog input value intothe A68AD as an offset value.
GAIN switch
At t h e ON position, stores the applied analog input value into the
A68AD as a gain value.
Switches marked are valid only in test mode.
3-14

Name
Station number setting switches Channel select switch OFFSET switch GAIN switch
MELSEC-A
Doscription
(1)x
(L) x 1
10
Used to set the station number of the A68ADC in a range from 1 to ( 6 4 occupied stations + 1).
Used to select the channel for offseVgain adjustment. (Positions 0 and 9 select no processing.) By turning this ON in the TEST mode (short the TEST mode terminals), the analog input value at that time is stored as the offset value in the A68ADC. By turning this ON inthe TEST mode (short the TEST mode terminals), the analog input value at that time is stored as the gain value in the A68ADC.
Normal mode RUN LED Operation state indicator LEDs
Test mode
O n : Normally running Flicker: Write data error Off: 24 VDC is off or WDT error.
On: OFFSET or GAIN switch is ON. O f f : OFFSET or GAIN switch is OFF.
Normal communication Receive data error Off: Receive data error Normal communication
LINK RUN LED LINK ERR LED
On: On: Off:
Test mode terminals
Shorted when setting offsotlgain.
Terminal block for twisted pair cables and power supply cables
station
From the pmvious
To thc next statio!
Rest switch
Hardware rebet Used to initialize buffer memory and operation processingof the A68ADC. By turning this ON, the control input signalX5 of the A68ADC turns ON. (Device number of control 110 signals depends on station setting.)
3-17
MELSEC-A
3 .
Description
'RUN' LED
Application
Indicates the operating status of the AlS64AD. (Normal mode) On : Indicates that the AlS64AD is operating without faw Flash : Writing data error occurred. Off : External power 5 VDC is not supplied to the AlS64AD or AlS64AD is in WDT error (Test mode) On Off
.-
: OFFSET or GAIN switch is ON. : OFFSETand GAIN switchesare OFF.
Channel select switch Used to specify the channel for the offseVgain adjustment. (Channel other than channels 1 to 4 is not processed.) OFFSET switch OFFSET
I
Stores the analog input value in AlS64AD as an offset value by setting the switch to the OFFSET side.
GAIN switch
Test mode terminals TEST
t 3
Stores the analog input value in AlS64AD as an offset value by setting the switch to the GAIN side.
Connected between terminals No.1 and No.2 to set the offseffgain values.
3-18
3. A-D, D-A CONVERSION MOQU$ES

3.5
Performance Specifications
1.
MELSEC-A
Itm Analog input
Selection depends on input terminals. Voltage: -10 to 0 to +10 VDC (Input resistance: 30 Kn) Current: +4 to +20 mA DC (Input resistance: 250 i2) '-20 to 0 to +20 mA can also be used for current input. Digital output A CPU: 16-bit, signed binary (-2048 to +2047)
I
P u f o r n u n c r Specifications
Analog Input
+10 v
Digital Output
I10 characteristics
+5 V or +20 mA 0 V or +4 mA -5 V or -12 mA
+loo0
-1000 -2000 -10
+2000
Maximum resolution Overall accuracy
Maximum conversion soeed Absolute maximum input Number Of analog input points
method
I I
Voltage: 5 mV (112000) Current: 20 pA (1/1000) Within: fl % (Accuracy with respect to the maximum vl,,,a, Maximum 2.5 mdchannel Voltage: k15 V Current: +30 mA 8 channeldunit Photocoupler insulation bettween output terminals and PC power (Non-insulated betweenchannels) 32 points 38-point terminal block 0.75 to 2 mm2 (Applicable tightening torque: 7 kg.cm)
Number of I 0 points 1 Connection terminal Applicable wire size Applicable terminal Internal current consumption (5 V)
V1.25-3, V1.25-YS3A. V2-S3, V2-YS3A

0.9 A
(1) Differences between an A68AD and an A68AD-S2

A68AD Method of designating the channel by which AD conversion is performed Timing of designating the channel by which A-D is performed A-D conversioncompleted flag
Set the number of channels beginning with channel 1.
A68AD-S2 Set the presence or absence of A-D

~~~~~~n to Enabled even in the middle of A-D conversion is performed conversion The bits that correspond to B to 88 of buffer O address 35 are ON.
Only once (at power ON) None
(The User's Manual of the utilized module gives details.)
3-19

3.5.2
AOJ248AD
Item Analog input Diaital o u t w t Specifications Selection depends on input terminals. Voltage: -10 to 0 to +10 VDC (Input resistance: 30 KQ) Current: +4 to +20 mA DC (Input resistance: 250 Q) -20 to 0 to +20 mA can also be used for current input.
MELSEC-A
A CPU: 16-bit, signed binary (-2048 to +2047)

Analog input +10 v Digital Output
+2000
+0 o0 l
+5 V or +20 mA
0 V or +4 mA
-5 V or -12 mA
*O
-1000
-2000
-10 v
Voltage: 5 mV (1/2000) Current: 20 PA ( 1 H 000)
Maximum resolution Overall accuracv Maximum conversion speed Absolute maximum input Number of analog input points Insulation method Number of 10 points 1 Connection terminal Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal internal current consumption (5 V) Weight kg (Ib)
I Maximum 2.5 pslchannel

Voltage: 515 V Current: f30 mA
Within f l % (Accuracy with respect to the maximum value)
8 channelslunit
Photocoupler insulation between output terminals and PC power (Non-insulated between channels)
I 36-point terminal block I 0.75 to 2 mm2 (Applicable torque: tightening

V1.25-3, V1.25-YS3A, V2-S3, V2-YS3A
o.7 A
7 kg.cm)
0.6 (1 32)
POINTI
Analog input allowed for maximum resolution and overall accuracy, is from -10 to 0 to +10 V or from -20 to 0 to +20 mA.
3 - 20

3 5 3 A68ADC ..
Item
Analog input Digital output Specifications %election depends on Input terminals. Voltage: -10 to 0 to +10 VDC (Input resistance: 30 KQ) Current: +4 to +20 mA DC (Input resistance: 250 n) -20 to 0 to +20 mA can also be used for current input. 16-blt, signed Mnary ( l l - b i t data part) -2048 to +2047
MELSEC-A
Analog Input
+10 v
Digital Output
+2WO
+loo0
I/O characteristics
+5 V or +20 mA
0 V or +4 mA
-5 V or -12 mA
M
-1000 -2000 -10
v
Maximum resolution
~ ~ ~~
.~
Overall accuracy Maximum conversion speed Absolute maximum input Number of analog input points Insulation method Occupied I/O stations (points) Connection terminal Applicable wire size Applicablesolderlessterminal
~~~
Within *1 % (Accuracy with respect to t h e maximum value) '1 Maximum 2.5 mdchannel '2 Voltage: *15 V Current: *30 mA
Voltage: 5 mV (112000) '1 Current: 20 uA (111000)

~ ~~~
~-
~~
~~
1 8 channeldunit
1 4 stations (32points)
Photocoupler insulation between output terminals and PC p o w e r (Non-insulated between channels)
47-point terminal block
I V1.25-3,V1.25-YS3A,V2-S3,V2-YS3A
24 VDC internal current consumption

~~~
0.75 to 2 mm2 (18 to 14 AWG) (Applicable tightening torque: 7 kgcm (6.06 I b h ) ) 0.3-A
Weight kg (Ib) Outside dimensions mm (in.)
I 1.01 (2.22)
170 (6.69) (H) x 100 (3.94) (W) x 80 (3.15) (D)
~~
POINTS[
'1 Analog input allowed for maximum resolution and overall accuracy, is from -10 to 0 to +10 V or form -20 to 0 to +20 mA.
'2 The maximum conversion speed indicates that of a single A68ADC
module. The time requiredfor the PC CPU to read digital output after A/D conversion should be the maximum conversion speed plus the time required for communication with the A68ADC.
3-21
MELSEC-A
output
Digital
1/8000: -8192 to 8191
10 characteristics 1
Maximum resolution
The gain value is set to 5 V/20 mA and the offset value is set to 0 VI 4 mA at factory.
POINTI
The available analog input range for the maximum resolution and overall accuracy is as follows: Voltage: -10 to 0 to +10 V Current: -20 to 0 to +20 mA
3-22
3. AID, D-A CONVERSION MODULES;..: .. . .:-<*;

,,
,. ,, :,
MELSEC-A
3.6
Wiring Instructions Protect external wiring against noise with the following precautions:
(1) Separate AC and DC wiring. (2) Separate main circuit and/or high voltage wiring from conrol and sig-
nal wiring.
(3) Where applicable, ground the shielding of all wires to a common
ground point.
3.7
Unit Connection Example

(1) Voltageinput
Signal source: 0 to k10 V
A-D conversion module
D e
(2) Current input
'1 se? h&? il

I I I
T5" *
-15 V
Signal source: 0 to +20 mA
I
I
.A
*l: the cable, use a two-core twisted shielded wire. For '2: Indicates the input resistance of the A-D conversion module.
'3: For current input, be sure to connect the terminals (v+) and ( l + ) .
'4: If noise or ripple is generated at the external wiring, connect a capacitor of approximately 0.1 to 0.47 pF25WV between terminals V and COM.
'5: If there is excessive noise, ground the unit.
I
I
~POINTJ
The FG terminal of the A-D conversion module and the FG terminal of the power supply unit are not connected together internally.
1
3-23

3.8
3.8.1
MELSEC-A
AW2-62DA and A62DA Digital-to-Analog Conversion Modules TrouMeQhooting flow chart
L_J
Error Occurrence
'RUN' LED of DA converter module
YES
Section 5.2.2 'Flow chart used when 'RUN' LED has turned off'
No
YES Section 3 2 3 'Flow chart used when ana .. log output le not properly'
3 - 24

3.8.2 F k w chart used when "RUN" LED has flickemd or tumud off
'RUN' LED flickers
MELSEC-A
Test terminals 1 and
NO (SHORT)
YES (OPEN)
Open the circuit across test terminals 1 and 2.
NO (F
1
YES (OFF) Monitor XO. Turns on if there has been a watch dog timer error in the DA converter module.
TYES
power capacity, calculate current consum~tion.
the DA converter module.
Recheck by loading and unloading
El Z I
Reselect the power module. supply
nearest sales representative to-
0
Module is OK
3-25

383 ..
FLOW chart USBd when m goutput & b I
MELSEC-A
not ptovkbd properly
Analog output is not
I" .
Connect 24 VDC.
Read a n y error step number with peripheral device. Error occurs at the step of TO instruction.
Monitor D9008 by with peripheral device.
check the corresponding analog
YES
Check if the condition for executing TO instruction ison. Check if the address of buffer memor specified TO instruction is the d i s h value address of channe1 where data is to be written. Check the wiring (voltage or current) of DA converter module. Check that ourput range setting jumper positions are correct. Check if offsetlgain setting iscorrect. Disconnect the wiring from the analog output of the DA converter module and measure analog output value. DA converter
Check the 1 0 number of DA con1 verter module and the 10 number 1
est sales representative together
Please return the unit to the near-
The module is probably being affected by noise. Check all wiring and grounding
3-26
MELSEC-A
The following contents are written into D9008 when an error has occurred during executionof the FROM or TO instruction.
Contont (BIN vriuo) of SpOCi8i Register
DOOOB
40
Error
Uass8ge
CPU Status
Error m d Cause
~ ~~~~
CONTROL-BUS ERR
stop
FROM and TO instructions cannot be executed. Hardware failure of AD converter module (special function module), CPU unit, or base unit.
When the FROM or TO instruction has been executed, access has been made to the special function module but M answer is returned. The I accessed AD converter module (special function module)has failed. Access has been made (FROM or TO instruction has been executed) a to slot where the AD converter module (special function module)is not loaded. The content of FROM or TO instruction is incorrect or the stage number retting of extension base unit is improper.
41
S.P UNIT DOWN
stop
stop
46
s.p
Continuous operation can be performed by the setting of parameter.
3-27

3.9
AMDAVCIDAIC Digital-to-AnalogConversionUnit
MELSEC-A
3.9.1
Error code list

(1) If an error has occurred when data is written to the A64DAVC/DAIC (the R U N LED fickers), any of the error codes mentioned in the list below is stored in buffer memory at address 9. When the A2CCPU is used, the same error code is stored also in special registers D9180 to D9193. When the AJ71 PT32-S3 is used, the same error code is stored also in buffer memory at addresses 196 to 209.
Enor Cod.
100
I
(Read error)
Cause
Designated head address is out of buffer memory. Designated range of read words includes addresses out of buffer memory. Designated head address is out of buffer memory. Designated range of write words includes addresses out of bueffer memory. Write was attempted to read-only areas.
Corrctima Action
Correct data which designates range out of buffer memory.
'
(Write error)
101 (65H) 102 ' (664 103 (671-1) 104 (68H)

(69H)
Correct data whichh designates range out of buffer memory. Correct data which designates range read-only areas.
Command code other than read (1)or wirte (2)is received. Data was received immediately after read command (1). Read and write word length is s e t at '. 0 ' The number of words set by write command data differs from that of received data. Digital values were set out of the specified range. [ ] indicates the channel on which the error occurred. Analog output enable/disable settingwas done with other than 0 or 1. [ ] indicates the channel on which the error occurred. Digital value resolution was set with other than 1, 2 or 3. Correct digital values into the specified range. Correct analog output enable/disable setting to 1 (enable) or 0 (disable). Correct digital value resolution setting to (,/4000), (l,sooo~ (1,12000). or
May be influenced by noise. Take measures against noise.
105
l1 [
130
3-28
3. AID, D-A CONVERSION MODULES
'
'
1..
MELSEC-A
(a) If two or more errors occur continuously, the error code forthe first error is stored, and following error codes are not stored.
(b) Error code reset is done by writing "0" to address 18 of buffer memory. (Figures other than 0 are ignored.)
(2) When the AJ71 PT32-S3 is used, error codes for the errors occur during communication with remote terminal modules are stored in buffer memory at addresses 196 to 209 in addition to the error codes for errors detected by the A64DAVClDAIC.
.Caw Data written to the remote terminal transmission areas includes errors. Corrective Action
Correct the data.

a
Remote terminal module malfunction.
a
a
Reset faulty remote terminal module. Turn OFF and then ON the power. If the above procedures do not recover the system, the system hardware is faulty. Please consult Mitsubishi representative.
Remote terminal transmission area set range is smaller than the number of words used by remote terminal modules. Communication between the master module and remote terminal modules is faulty.
I
Correct initial setting data SO that the set range is larger than the number of words used by remote terminal modules.
Noise or failure.
terminal module
Remote terminal receive area set range is smaller than the number of words used by remote terminal modules.
Correct initial wetting data SO that the set range is larger than the number of words used by remote terminal modules.
3-29

3.9.2
MELSEC-A
When the RUN LED flickers or turned OFF

(1) When flickers:
Check Point
I
~
C o m t i b a Action
~ ~~~
Data which disables write or readis written to the A64DAVCIDAIC.
I
I
Refer to the List of Error Codes (Section 3.9.1) for the cause, and correct the sequence program. Check the transmission system and influence of noise. Perform offseUgain adjustment, and then, open the TEST terminals. Perform offseUgain adjustment in the specified range.
The TEST terminals are shorted. (Test mode) The LED is flickering at 0.1 sec intervals in test mode.
(2) When turned OFF:

Check Point 24 power VDC supply is turned on.
Corrective Action Make the sure power supply. Adjust the voltage within 15.6 to 31.2 V range. Add a loop to turn ON the MINI-SS link communication start signal Y(n+28) to thfsequence program. Reset the PC CPU, and start them in thu same manner. If error code '6' is again representative.
24 VDC power supply voltage is within the set range.
If the MINI-S3 link is connected, the MINIS3 link communication start signal Yp+28) is turned ON.
If the MINI-S3 link is connected, error code '6' may be stored in the master module buffer memory at address 196 to 209.
If the MINI-S3 link is connected, error codes .9. and may be stored in the master module buffer memory at address 196 to 209.
I
~ ~ ~ r , B d ' p ' : , B , z be ~ ~ s ~ ~ r ~ ~
Reset the PC CPU, and start them in the same manner. If error codes '9' and '10'
~~,a,g,ai,n,:~~~ representative.
Check the cables.
~~
Data link cables are normal. The TEST terminals are shorted. (Test mode)
After offseVgain setting, open the TEST terminals.
3.9.3
When the LINK RUN LED turned OFF or the LINK ERR. LED turned ON
I I
Check Point The RUN LED is flickering. The RUN LED turned OFF.
I I
Action Corrective Follow Section Follow Section 3.9.2 (1). 3.9.2 (2).
I 1
3-30
3. A-D, D-A CONVERSION MODUL,F$,. *.

,
MELSEC-A
3.9.4
When analog output is not provicled comctiy
Check Point
C o m c t i v r Action
The RUN LED is flickering or turned OFF. The ERROR LED of the CPU module is flickering or turned ON. The RUN LED of the CPU module is flickering or turned OFF. A2CCPU is used:
Follow Section 3.9.2.

Refer to the Users Manual for respective CPU module for error content. Refer to the Users Manual for respective CPU module for error content. Refer to the AZCCPU Users Manual for error content.
i t
The RD/SD LED of the CPU module is flickering. (normal)
The MINI-S3 link communication start signal Y(+a)is turned ON.

The RUN LED of the master module is turned OFF.
Set the sequence program to turn ON the MINI-S3 link communicationstart signal.
When AJ71PT3243 is used:
Analog input signal lines are broken or disconnected. Locate trouble by checking the signal lines visually and for continuity. Disconnect the wiring from the analog output of the A64DAVCIDAIC and measure analog output at the module terminals.
Refer to the A171 PT32-S3 UsersManual for error content.
The RDlSD LED of the master module is flickering. (normal)
Refer to the A171 PT32-S3 Users Manual for error content. If analog output measured atthe module terminals is correct, the external wiring may be broken or affected by noise. Check all wiring and grounding. Separate the module from the frame and disconnect the grounding circuit. (Mount the module to the DIN rail.)
3-3 1

3.10 AlS62DA Degital-to-Analog Conversion Module 3.10.1 W f m the RUN LED ftashezr or goets OFF
(1) When the RUN LED goes OFF:
MELSEC-A
I
I
Itrnu to Chock
Are the TEST terminals shorted? (Test mode) Has an error occurred in the CPU module?
Cornctivr Actions
Make offseVgain adjustments, and then open the TEST terminals. Refer to the appropriate User's Manual for error information, and correct the error. Recalculate the total number of amps for the CPU, 110 module, and special function module installed to the barn unit, and replace the power supply module if newssaw. Reset the CPU module.
II
I
Is the power supply module (5 VDC) that is installed to the base unit not getting enough current?
Is the A1 S62DA WDT error flag set?
(2) When the RUN LED flashes: Itrms to Chock

ActionsCorrectivo
Set the
r
I
~~
Are the TEST terminals shorted when offsetlgain select switch is set to OFFSET or GAIN? (Test mode) Does the LED flash at one-tenth (0.10) of a second intervals when In the test mode?
and then open the TEST teminals.
Reset the CPU module.
3.10.2
W h e n the analog value is 0 Vx) mA

(1) When the values of all channels are 0 V/O mA:
Items to Chock
Corrective Actions
Follow procedures in Section 3.10.1. Set the analog output enable/disable of the channels to be used to enable. Follow procedures in Section 3.10.7. Follow procedures in Section 3.10.8. Write the digital values of the channel to be converted from digital to analog.
Is the RUN LED of the AlS62DA turned OFF?
Are the analog output enableldisablechannels of each channel set to disable? is the WDT error flag set?
Is the D-A conversion ready flag set?
Is the digital value written in the digital value setting area (addresses 1 and 2) of the buffer memory?
3-32
3. A-D, D-A CONVERSION MODULES . .

(2) When the value of a given channel is 0 VI0 mA:
Itoms to C k k
MELSEC-A
~orr.ctivo Actions
Confirm the data set in the analog output enable/disable channel setting area of the buffer memory. Write the digital value.
'
Is the analog output enable/di6able channel with its' 0 VI0 mA' analog value set t disable? o
Is the digital valueof the channel with its ' 0 VI0 mA' analog value written in the digital value setting area of the buffer memory?
Is the external wiring
done correctly?
Make sure
the external wiring
is correct.
3.10.3 When a ao values are offgetvakres nl g
(1) When the analog values of all channels are offset values:
Items to Chock Corrective Are the TEST terminals shorted? (Test mode)
Actions
I
I
hannel
Is the RUN key switch of the CPU module set to a position other than 'RUN'?
Are the D-A conversion value output enable flags of each
Is the digital value writtenin the digital value Mtting area (addresses 1 and 2) of the buffer memory?
Make offsewgain adjustments, and h n open the TEST terminals. Set the switch to the RUN position. Set the D-A conversion value output flags of the channels to be used. Write the digital values of the channel to be converted from digital to analog.
(2) When the analog value of a given channel i an offset value: s
I I
Items to Check
Is the D-A conversion value output enable flag setting for a channel whose analog value is an offset value reset?
Set the D-A conversion value output enable flag.
Is the digital value of the channel whose analog value is an offset value written to the digital value setting area of the buffer memory?
Write the digital value.
3.10.4 Analog v u s are output atthough theC W module is set to STOP ae l

(1) When the analog output does not change after setting to STOP
Itoms to Chock
Are the HOLDXLEAR setting terminals shorted (held)?
IS the D-A conversion value output enable flag of the channel outputting analog values set to enable? If one or more of these conditions exist, makethe necessary corrections.
Corrective Actions
Is the mabiddisable output of the channel outputting analog values setto enable?
3-33
MELSEC-A
(2) When the analog output changes after setting to STOP:
Item to Chock
Corrective Actions
Confirm the otfset value. When making the output value 0 V/O mA, set the offwt again.
Is the outputted analog value offset value?
3.10.5 When analog values autput although the output enable Rag ( Y l O and Y11) is reset
(1) When offset values are output:
Items to Check Corrective
Are the HOLDICLEAR setting terminals shorted (held)? Is the D-A conversion value output enable flag of the channel outputting offset values set to disable? Are the HOLD/CLEAR setting terminals shorted (HOLD)?
If one or more of these conditions exist, make the necessary corrections.
Actions
Is the analog output enable/disable channel for outputting analog values set to enable? Is the digital value not set to 'O'?
(2) When analog values (except offset values)

Items to Check Are the HOLD/CLEAR setting terminals shorted(held)? An, the HOLDlCLEAR setting terminals of analog output shorted (HOLD)?
are output:
Comctive Actions
Is the 0-A conversion value output enable flag of the channel outputting analog valuesset to enable? Is the analog output enable/disable channel for outputting analog values set to enable?
Is the digital value not set to 'O'?
If one or more of these conditions exist, make the necessary correctlom.
3.10.6
When digital and analog values do not match

(1) When both digital values and analog values change:
Corrective
I
I
Check
Items to
the analog value?
I I
Does the digital'value match Are the AlS62DA and
Actions
external devices properly wired?
Correct the offsevgain values.

, " , ~ $ ' d " , ~ & ~ ~ ~ the~ ~ n o
and the
I s the digital values written in the digital setting area (addresses 1 and 2) incorrect?
Write the proper values to the addresses of the corresponding channels in the buffer memory.
3-34
3. A-D, CEA CONVERSION MODULES ..,.
,,
MELSEC-A
(2) When the digital value changes and the analog value is fixed:
I I I
Itom8 to Check
Is the RUN key switch of the CPU module set to a position other than 'RUN'?
I
I
Corroctive Actions Set the switch to the RUN position Write the digital value of the channel to be converted from digital to analog.
I
I
Is the digital valuewritten in thedigital value wtting area of the buffer memory (addresses 1 and 2)?
3.10.7 WDT error flag (XO) is set

It
to C W k
Conoctive Actions Check to see if there is a transmission error, and if the CPU module is affected by noise.
When the CPU module i s reset, is the WDT error flag reset?
3.10.8 D-A conversion READY flag ( l meet X) is
Itoms to Check Corrective

I
Actiom
Is there an error in the CPU module?

Is there an I/O number error?
See the corresponding User's Manual for the respective CPU module for error information. Correct the error.
Confirm and correct the I/O number. Open the TEST terminals and cancel the test mode.
Are the TEST terminals shorted? (Testmode)
3.10.9 Error flag (X2) is set

Itoms to Check
Corrwtivo Actions Verify that a digital value outside the setting range was written in which data other that '0' is stored to a channel and its corresponding check code storage area. Clear the set value storage area with the error reset flag(Y18).
Is a value that i s not M)t in the setting value check code storage area (addresses and 1) of the buffer memory?
.o.
r
POINT
If these corrective measures do not solve the problem, there may be a hardware malfunction in the module.
Consult a Mitsubishi representative.
3-35

3.11 Nomenclature 3.1 1.1 A62DA
MELSEC-A
TRUN LED I
Indicates the operating status of A62DA. (Normal mode) ON: During normal operation OFF: 5 V power off or watch dog timer error (Test mode) Flicker: Flickers at intervals of 0.25s when the OFFSETlGAIN select switch is located at t OFFSET or GAIN posih tion. Flickers at hi h speed at intervals of 0.1s when the setting range tfefer to Section 6.1) has been exceeded and the upper limit value or lower limit value has been reached. OFF:When both the OFFSET/GAIN select switch is located at the SET position.
Test mode terminals
CHANNEL select switch

J
Used to select a channel for the adjustment of offset value and gain value.
Input power supply terminals 24V DC.
OFFSETlGAlN select switch OFFSET posetion: Offset value calibration mode GAIN position: Gain value calibration mode SET position: When the switch is moved from the OFFSET or GAIN position to the SET position, an offset value or a gain value is stored into A62DA.
[
19
JPlDOWN switch
Jsed to increase or decrease the off set value or gain value of specified channel at the following rate: 1) On less than 1.5 seconds: In increments or decrements of 1.25 mV (0 to 5 V mode) 1 mV (1 to 5 V mode) 2.5 mV (0 to 10 V mode) 5 pA (0 to 20 mA mode) or 4 pA (4 to 20 mA mode) at one time. 2) On 1.5 seconds or longer: In increments or decrements of 1.25 mV (0 to 5 V mode) 1 mV (1 to 5 V mode) 2.5 mV (0 to 10 V mode) 5 pA (0 to 20 mA mode) or 4 pA (4 to 20 mA mode) per 0.05 seconds.
Switches marked. are valid only in test mode.
3-36

3.1 1.3 WDAVCIDAIC
MELSEC-A
3-38
No.
MELSEC-A
N8mr
Station number setting switches Channel select switch
[L)x
10 (I-) x 1
Used to set the station number of the A64DAVClDAIC in a range horn 1 to (64 - occupiedstations + 1).
Used to select the channel for offseVgain adjustment. (Positions 0 and 9 select no processing.) Used to set offoeVgain values in test mode. (1) OFFSET: Offset value calibration (2) GAIN: Gain value calibration (3) SET: OffseVgaIn value storage (Analog output when this switch is turned horn OFFSETlGAlN to SET is stored as offmugain value in the internal memory of the AWDAVCIDAIC.)
OFFSETlGAIN setting switch
UPlDOWN switches
Used to adjust analogoutput of offsetlgain of specified channel. Turning ON the UPIDOWN witches makes analog output lncrease/decrease.
On: Normally running Normal Flicker: Readlwrite data error mode Off: 24 VDC is off or WDT error. Flicker: Flickers at 0.5 SIX intervals when the OFFSET/GAIN switch is in t h e OFFSET or GAIN position. Flickers at 0.1 sec intervals when analog output exceeded the upper or lower limit of the setting range when the UPlDOWN switches are used. Off: When the OFFSETlGAlNswitch isin the SET position. Normal communication
RUN Operation state indicator LEDs Test mode
LINK RUN LINK ERR
On: Off:
On: Off:
Normal communication
Test mode terminals

Analog output HOLDlCLEAR setting terminals
Shorted when setting offseffgain.

(1) HOLD setting: short the terminals.
(2) CLEAR setting: Open t h e terminals.
Terminal Mock for twisted pair cables and power supply cables
From the previous station
x x
To the next statior
&st switch
Hardware reset Used to initialize buffer memory and operation processing the of A64DAVClDAIC. By turning this ON, the control input signal X5 of the A64DAVClDAIC turns ON. (Device number of control I/O signals depends on station setting.)
3 -39

3.11.4 AlS62DA
MELSEC-A
No.
~~
Description
Application Indicates the operating status of the AlS62Dk (Normal mode) On: Indicates thatthe AlS62AD is operating without fault. Off: External power 5 VDC is not supplied to the AlS62DA or AlS62DA Is in WDT error Flash: When the digital value is written beyond the high ot low limit this LED flashes every second. (Test mode) Off: OFFSETlGAlN select switches is inthe'SET'position. Flash: When the offsetlgain select switchis s e t to either the OFFSEl or GAIN position, this LED flashes every half(0.5) second. When the UP/DOWN switch is set to the upper or lower limit of a setting range, this LED flashesevery tenth (0.10) of a second. Used to specify the channel for the offseUgain adjustment.
Channel select switch
CH1 CH2
DFFSETIGAIN switch
OFFSET position GAIN position SET position
GAIN
: Sets the offset value. : Sets the gain value. : The offsevgain value is stored the AlS62DA to internal memory when the switch is moved from 'OFFSET'PGAIN' to 'SET'.
3 -40
3. A-D, P A CONVERSION MODULES

Application
MELSEC-A
Increase or decreases the offseffgain value for the specified channel.
Test mode terminals
Connected between terminals No.1 and No.3 to set the offseffgain values.
Output HOLDICLEAR setting terminals
Used to hold or clear the analog output at the time of CPU STOP. Disconnected between terminal No.2 and N0.4: CLEAR Connected between terminal No.2 and No.4: HOLD
3-41

3.12 Performance Specifications 3.12.1 A62DA
Item
Digital input Max. setting value Voltage: f2000 Cunent: f l O W Specifications
MELSEC-A
Analog output
Voltage: -0to +10 VDC (External load resistance: 500 R to 1 MR) Current: +4 to +20 mA can also be used for currentoutput. (External load resistance: 0 R to 600 R) Digital input Analog output +10 v +5 v Current
Voltage
I/O characteristics
+2000 + 1000
0
-2000
Voltage Maximum resolution Current 20 JLA ( /1000) 1
fl ?&
-1000
ov -5 v -10 v
+20 mA +4 mA -12mA
5 mV (1/2000)
Over accuracy (Accuracy for max. value)
Maximum conversion speed Absolute maximum output
Within 15 ms12 channels (Time for 1 channel is also the same.) Note: Time period between digital input write and specified analogvoltage (current) reached. Voltage: 0 to +12 V Current: 0 to +28 mA Note: Max. output voltage and current restricted by output protection circuit. 2 channeldmodule Photocoupler insulation between output terminals and PC power (Non-insulated between channels) 20-point terminal block V1.25-3, V1.25-YS3A, V2-S3, V2-YS3A
I
Insulation method Number of I/O occupying points Connection terminal Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal Internal current consumption (5 V) External Weight kg (Ib)
32 points
I 0.75
to 2 mm2 (18 to 14 AWG) (Applicable tightening torque: 7 k g a n (6.06 Ib.in.))
0.6 A
21.6 to 26.4 VDC 0.35 A (at 24 VDC)
The analog output ranges for maximum resolution and maximum overall accurary, is from -10 to 0 to +10 V or from -20 to 0 to +20 mA.
3-42
MELSEC-A
3.1 2.2 AOJ242DA

ltrm
Sepocificationr Voltage output, digital setting range: f2000 lO f Current output, digital setting range: O O Selectively used depending on output terminals. Voltage: -10 to 0 to +10 VDC (Extornat load resistance: 500 0 to 1 Ma) Current: +4 to +20 mADC (External load resistance: 0 Q to 600 a) '-20 to 0 to +20 mA can also be used far current output.
Digital input
Analog output
II
Digital Input +2000
Analog Output
I +10 v
Voltme
Cumrnt
I-
Voltage: 5 mA (112000) Current: 20 FA (1/1000) Overall accuracy Maximum conversion speed

Within fl % (Accuracy with respect to the maximum value)
Within 16 md2 channels (lime for 1 channel is also the same.) Note: Time from when digital input is mittento when analog voltage (current) changes from -10 V (-20 mA) to +10 V (+20 mA).
Absolute maximum output

1 I
Voltage: f 1 2 v Currant: f28 mA Note: Max. outout voltage and current restricted bvoutwt wotection circuit.
Number of analog output points Insulation method Number of 110 occupying points Connection terminal Applicable wire size
2 channelslunit Photocoupler insulation between output terminals and PC power (Non-insulated between channles) 64 points 36-point terminal block
0.75 to 2 mm2 (Applicabletightening torque: 7 kg.cm)
1
I
i Applicable terminal solderless

I
I
V1.25-3, V1.25-YS3A, V2-S3, V2-YS3A

0.55 A
1 consumption (5 V)
Internal current
21.6 to 26.4 VDC 0.23 A (at 24 VDC) 0.6 A, 100 ms (24 VDC) Weight kg (Ib) 0.75 (1.65)
3-43
3. A-D, P A CONVERSION MODULES
MELSEC-A
Item
(1) 16-bit signed binary data (2) setting r n e ag: Rwlution Setting
Sofflng range
-4096 to 4095 -8192 to 8191
1I 12000
-12288 to 12287
Analog input
-10 to 0 to 10 VDC (External load resistance: 2 KQ to 1 Mil)
110 characteristics
-2000 -4000
-4000 -8000
-6000
-12000
-10 v
-5 v
I I I
I
When offset setting is 0 V and gain setting is 10 V. ,/4000, 1/8000, 1112000
Maximum resolution of digital value
overall accuracy
conversion speed
output paints
I fl.O
I
I -log
channeldmodule 4 Photocoupler insulation between output terminals and PC power (Non-insulation between channels) 4 stations (32 points) 47-point terminal block
~~~
Maximum 25 msec/4 channels (same for 1 channel) Note: from Time input of digital value till specified analog
value (voltage) is output.
Insulation method
Occupied 110 stations (points) Connection terminal
(1 8 to 14 AWG) (Applicable tightening torque: 7 kg.cm (6.06 k i n . )
Applicable solderless terminal 24 VDC internal current consumption Weight kg (Ib) Outside dimensions mm (in.)
V1.25-3, V1.25-YS3A, V2-S3, V2-YS3A 0.12 A 1.01(2.22) 170 (6.69) (H) x 100 (3.94) (W) x 80 (3.15) (D)
3. AID, P A CONVERSION MODULES

3.1 2.4 A W A I C
Item
'..
MELSEC-A
Sp.cificationa
(1) 16-bit signed binary data (2) Setting range: Rorolution Setting
Digital output
114000
118OOo
0 to 4095 0 to 8191
S tl g range otn
1112000
0 to 12287
Analog input
0 DC to 20 mA (External load redstance:0 to 600 a)
Digit81 Valw Resolution

I10 characteristics
C
4000
1I12000
Analog Output
8 9 2000 aa 0
When offset setting is 4 mA and gain settingis 20 mA.
1,4000, 1/8000, 1/12000
+12 mA
+4 mA
I
I
I
I overall accuracy
Maximum resolution of digital value
I fl.O %
Maximum 25 msed4 channels (same for 1 channel) Note: Time from input of digital value till specified analog 4 channels/module
value (current) is output.
Analog output points Insulation method
I Occupied 110 stations(points) I 4stations (32 points)

b o n n e c t i o n terminal Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal
I
I
I
Photocoupler insulation between output terminals and PC power (Non-insulation between channels)
47-point terminal block 0.75 to 2 mm2 (18 to 14 AWG) (Applicable tightening torque: 7 kgem (6.06 Ib.in.)
V1.25-3, V1.25-YS3A, V2-S3, V2-YS3A
0.1 5 A
1.01 (2.22)
24 VDC internal current consumption
Weight kg (Ib)
Outside dimensions mm (in.)
170 (6.69) (H) x 100 (3.94) (W) x 80 (3.15) (D)
3-45

:
MELSEC-A
3.12.5 AIS62DA
1t.m Speclficrtions Voltrgr output Cunrnt Output
Digital Input Analog output
[k"
-4Oooto 4Ooo
-12000 to 12000 -10 to 0 to 10 VDC (External load resistance: 2 KR to 1 MQ)
g o to 8000 o0
1112000
0 to 4000 0 to 8OOo 0 to 12000
Resolution
110 characteristics
114000 118000 1112000 4000
1 : : output :
0 to 20 mADC
(External load resistance:0 to 600 n)

output
~114000 118000 1112000

8000 4000 2000 6000 4000
Analog value '2 20 mA 12 mA 4 mA
4000 Digtital 6000 2000 0 input value -2000 -4000 114000 118000 1I 12000 2.5 mV 1.25 mV 0.83 mV
8000
-4000
12000 -6000 -12000
-8000
10 v 5V -5 v -10 v (10 V) (10 V)
12000
ov
Maximum resolution of analog value Overall accuracy
(low
5pA 2.5 pA 1.7 pA
(20 mAi (20 mA (20 mA
f .O % (Accuracy to the maximum value) l
Maximum conversion time Absolute maximum output Output short circuit protection Analog output points Insulation method
~~
Maximum 25 mead2 channels (same for 1 channel) Voltage: f 1 2 V Current: 28 mA Provided

I
2 channelslmodule Photocoupler insulation k t w e e n output terminals and PC power (Non-insulation between channels)
Number of 110 points Connection terminal OffssUgain adjustment Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal Internal current consumption (5 VDC) External dimensions mm (in.) Weight kg (Ib)
+I
20-point terminal block
By the test switch(Wlthout using offseugain adjusting knobs)

0.75 to 1.5 mm2
1.25-3, 1.25- YSBA, V1.25-3, V1.25-YS3A

0.8 A
130 (5.12) (H) x 34.5 (1.36) (W) x 93.6 (3.69) (D) 0.32 (0.70)
I .... When the offset value is set to 0 V and the aain value is set to 10 V *2....When the offset value is set to 4 mA and thegain value is set to 20 mA.
3-46

3.13 Wiring instructions
MELSEC-A
Protect external wiring against noise with the following precautions:

(1) Separate AC and DC wiring.
(2) Separate main circuit and/or high voltage wiring from control and signal wiring.
(3) Where applicable, ground the shielding of all wires to a common ground point.
3.14 Module Connection Example
D-A conversion module
Motor drive unit, etc.
'1: Use two core, shielded wiring (twisted). '2: If noise or ripple is generated by the external wiring, connect a 0.1 to 0.47 pF25WV
capacitor to the input terminal of external equipment.
IMPORTANT(
A given channel cannot be used for voltage and current outputs at the same time. Otherwise the internal elements will be damaged. Only use one set of terminals on each channel.
3 -47
4. HIGH-SPEED COUNTER MODULES

4.
MELSEC-A
HIGHSPEED COUNTER MODULES

This section explains the error descriptions and trouble shooting which can occur when high-speed counter modules are used.
4.1
4.1 .l Highpeed counter module does not count

High-speed counter module does n o t count.
AOJ2-D611 AD61,and AD6141 High-speed CouterModules
.--
Check and correct external wiring.
NO
Correct sequence program so that count enable is turned on.
N o
Check external connection.
Correct I10 assignment number.
4-1
MELSEC-A
modulo b d d on an
o boon( . s
NO
cor-
Set stage numbersetting
switch according to assignmen!.
Is main bar. pam capacity propor?
Assign High-speed counter module to extendon base with power supply unit.
counlor modulo
as-
YES
Move High-speed counter module to a station its with own CPU. If this is impossible check program.
countw modulo and c h d
Hardware fault
1
Remove foreign matter.
Please return the module to the nearest sales representative together with details af trouble.
4-2

4.1.2
MELSEC-A
Counter value is incorrect
NO
4-3
I

.i
MELSEC-A
4.2
4.2.1
ADGIC High-speed Counter Unit Error code list

(1) If an error occurs (RUN LED blinking) when executing FROM/TO instruction, the following error codes will be stored to buffer memory address 18. Correcr as follows.
Error Code
Error and Cause
Action Corroctive
100
(Read error) 1. When the FROM instruction is executed, head address number of buffer memory address is address 19 or larger. Confirm the sequence program and 2.An attempt is made to read words from the correct. area execeeding address 19. 3 An attempt is made to read write only . buffer memory. (Write error) 1. When the TO instruction is executed, head address number of buffer memory address is address 19 or larger. Confirm the sequence program and 2. An attempt is made to write words to the correct. area execeeding address 19. 3.An attempt is made to write to read only buffer memory. Commands other than readwrite have been received. Data has been rewritten due to noise. Number of read/write specified words 0 has been Execute communicationagain. Take proper measures against noises. Execute communicationagain. Take proper measures againstnoises. received. Execute communication again. Take proper measures against noises.
communication again. Take proper measures against noises.
~~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~
101
102
103
lo4
105
Data has been received when the FROM instruction is executed. The number of words written and the number of words received are different when the TO instruction is executed.
Values other than 8 or 18 have written been to the mode sequence the program and register (addresses 0 and 7). [[ J indicates the errorcorrect.(18 will beset as the default channel generating value.) number.]
I I
(a) When multiple errors occur, the AD61C stores the data error code of the first error detected by the AD61C and does not store subsequent errors. (b) The error code is reset by writing 0 to buffer memory address 18. (Written values other than 0 are ignored.) (c) When an error occurs, if error reset is executed without restoring the error, the AD61C restores normal state, the error code becomes 0, and the RUN LED is lit stopping blinking.
POINTS]
(1) When an AD61C error occurs, the A2CCPU stores a dedicated error code to special D. (2) When an AD61C error occurs, the AJ71 PT32-S3 stores the faulty station and AD61C error code to the buffer memory.
4-4

4.2.2 RUN LED is flickeringlOFF
(1) When flickering
~~~
MELSEC-A
Chock Im t
C o m l i v r Action
Read the AD61C error code, confirm using the error code list in Section 4.2.1, and correct the sequence program.
Is there data which cannot be writtbn toor readfrom the AD61C?
(2) When OFF

Check Item Corroctivr Action
'Is the 24 VDC power supply charged? Is the 24 VDC within ths rated voltage?
Is the wiring correct?
Turn On the power supply. Set the voltage to 15.6 to 31.2 V. Check for cut wires anderroneous wiring and correct. After confirming that the power supply is correct, tUm it ONlOFF repeatedly. (Confirm whether or not the link hardware is faulty because of noise, etc.) If the LED is OFF, AD61 C hardwareis faulty. Consult Mitsubishi representative.
Is there a hardware error detected (watchdog timer error)?
4.2.3
LINK RUN LED is OFF
I
4.2.4
Check Item
Is the RUN LED lit?
Corrective Action
When t h e RUN LED is flickering or OFF, correct according to Section 4.2.2. After confirming that thepower supply i s correct, turn it ON/OFF repeatedly. (Confirm whether or not the link hardware is faulty because of noise, etc.) If the LED is off, AD61C link hardware is faulty. Consult Mitsubishi representative.
Is a hardware I detected? error
LINK ERR. LED is ON
Check Item
Corrective Action
Is the communication cable wiring correct?
Confirm whether link data communication is disabled due to cable wire breakage, terminal block faulty connections or wiring faults, and correct. If the LED does not turn off when the wiring is correct, AD6lC link hardware is faulty. Consult Mitsubishi representative.
4-5

4.2.5
MELSEC-A
Count operations do not execute
I
L
Check Item
Are the RUN and LINK RUN LEDs lit? Is the LINK ERR. LED OFF?
~~
c o m w i v r Action
Correct according Sections4.2.2 and 4.2.3 If they are flickering or OFF. Correct according to Section 4.2.4 is the LINK ERR. LED is ON. Check the external wiring and correct.
If yes, check the external wiringand pulse generator and correct. If n , AD61 C hardware is faulty. Consult Mitsubishi o representative.
I
r
I
I
L
Is the external wiring of phases $A and B correct?

~ ~~
Are phases )A and +B LEDs lit by directly applying voltage to the count input terminal?
I the enable LED ON? s
If it is OFF, correct the sequence program so that it is turned ON. (Turn OFF the disable input at external input terminal.)
With the A2CCPU, coincidence t e AD61C station h number and program setting. With the AJ71PT32-S3. coincidence the program setting to the AJ71PT32-S3 buffer memory corresponding to the AD61C station number. Set the 1-phase specification of phase $A to the mode register or correct.
If it is the PC CPU, refer to the troubleshooting section of the manual of the PC CPU being used to recover correct operations. If it is the AJ71PT32-S3, return to normal operating state according to the troubleshooting section of the AJ71PT32-S3 manual.
Do the set AD61C station number and th. station number specified by the sequence program coincidence? Is the phase specified to the AD61C buffer memory by the sequence program written with a correct value?
Are the PC CPU or AJ71PT32-S3 indicatingan error?
(1) If counter operations cannot be executed even when the above check items are correct, AD61 C hardware is faulty. Consult Mitsubishi repre-
sentative.
4-6
.'
4. HIGHSPEED COUNTER MODULES

4.2.6
MELSEC-A
Count value is incorrect

Chock Item
Is the counter input specification correct?
Conecctive Action
Coincidence the counter input to the specification conditions. Correct the sequence program so that its data can be handled in 24-bit binary. For 1 -phase inputs, set 8 to the mode register and for 2phase inputs, set 18. (The default value is 18 for 2phase inputs) Use twised shield wire for counter input wiring.
Are the sequence program data handled in 24-bit binary?
Is the phase setting for the sequence program input pulses correct?
Is twisted shieldwire used for counter input wiring?
Are spurious counter values related to the operation of other equipment? Does noisecome in through the ground of the AD61C? Have adequate measures been taken against noise in the panel?
Is sufficient distance provided between heavy current equipment and counter input line?
Separate wiring of related equipment.
Disconnect the AD61C from the ground. If the case of the ADGlC contacts the ground, separate it from the ground. Provide CR surge suppression to magnetic switches, etc.
independently wire counter input line. Separate wire in panel 150 mm (5.91 in.) or more from power line.
Are counter values the same by providing the same count inputs to CH1 and CH2?
If the counter values are the same by providing the same count inputs to CH1 and CH2, do the pulse input waveform, rise, and fall conform to the specifications?
II not, AD61C hardware is faulty. Consult Mitsubishi representative.
Monitor and confirm the input waveform using a synchroscope. If the rise and fail are outside the specified value, resulting in a faulty waveform, correct the wavelorm.
(1) If counter operations cannot be executed correctly even when the
above check items are correct, AD61C hardware is faulty. Consult Mitsubishi representative.
4-7

43 4.3.1
MELSEC-A
AD62C High-speed CounterUnit
Error code list

(1) If an error occurs (RUN LED flashes) when executing a FROM/TO instruction, the error codes shown in Table below will be stored to buffer memory (address 12) for communications error code storage, or to (address 13) for multiple-dog setting error storage.
Error
Error Code
I
Causa
Data has been read from buffer memory address 150 or later. Data has been written buffer memory addresses 0 to to
1
Corroctivo Action
loo
has been read.
&
lol
4,or 150 or later.
.1 102
150 or later have beenread.
A command other than read (01H) or write (02H)has been received.

~ ~~~~~~~
.1 103
kmmunication errors
'0' number of read/write specified words has been
.1 104
received.
' lo5 '
Data has been receivedwhen a FROM instruction is executed. The number of words specified for write command data is different of that of received data.
Take appropriate measures to prevent noise interference. Execute Communications again-
111
'12
1 1
A value outside the range of 0 to 4 was set to the pulse input mode setting buffer memory (address 5)
a value from
to 4.
A value outside t h e range of 0 to 4 was set to the counter setting buffer memory (address 6).
'0' was set to the sampling/periodic time setting buffer
Set a value from to 4. 0
memory (address 11).
113
1 14
The preset value is the same as the ring counter value.
Iz: ks i i :l: :
Turn OFF
Set a value within the range of 1 to 65535.
so that they are

ring counter
A preset value or counter value was written do the buffer memory while thering counter command (Y 1 B) was ON.
~ ~ the write.
'
Multiple-dog setting error
2(
)I 1
Set the limit switch output The ON/OFF position data setting values of dogs 0 to 3 ONlOFF position data so that for a channel are not in ascending order. the values are in ascending order for eachdog.
A value outside the range of 0 to 4 was set in the multiple-dog setting.
Set a value of 0 to 4.
*l:These errors occur because of noise. Therefore, attempt the same operation again, and/or take appropriate measures to prevent noise interference.
( ) indicates a channel containing the first error during an operation.
[ ] indicates a dog containingthe first error during an operation.
4-8
MELSEC-A
(2)
Theerror codes for communication errors and multipledog setting errors are reset as shown below.
Enor
Communi-
R-t
Opurtion
catiofl
errors
Switch ON the communications e m r detection reset signal (YO4).

Write '0' to buffer memory address 12. Switch ON the multiple-dog setting error detection reset signal ( l YF). Write '0' to buffer memory address 13.
Multiple-dog wtting errors

i
4-9

4.3.2 RUN LED is flashlng/OFF
(1) Whenflashing
MELSEC-A
Ch0CkIt.m
Action
Con.ctivo
Is there data which connot be wdaen lo or read from the AD62C?
Read the AD62C error code,confirm using the error code in list Section 4.3.1, and correct the soquonce program.
(2) When OFF
Is the charged? supply24 VDC power Is the 24 the rated VDC within voltage?
1
1
Turn ON thepowersupply. Set the voltage to 15.6 to 31.2V. Check for cut wires and erroneous wiring and correct. After confirming that the power supply is correct, turn it ON/ OFF repeatedly. (Confirm whether oi not the link hardware is
If the LED is OFF, the AD62C hardware is faulty. Consult your nearest Mitsubishi representative.
Is the wiring correct?
fault detected (watchdog timer error)?
4.3.3
LINK RUN LED i OFF s
I
4.3.4LINK
Check Item Conoctivo Action
I s the RUN LED lit,
Whenthe RUN LED is flashing or OFF, correct according to Section 4.3.2. After confirming that the power supply is correct, turn it ON/ OFF repeatedly. (Confirm whether or not the link hardware is faulty because of noise, etc.)
If the LED is OFF, AD62C link hardware is faulty. Consult your nearest Mitsubishi representative.
Is a hardware error detected?
ERR. LED is ON
IItem Check
Is the communication cable wiring correct?
Action Corroctive Confirm whether link data communication is disabled due to cable wire breakage, terminal block faulty connections, or wiring faults, and correct.
if the LED does not turn OFF when the wiring is correct, AD62C link hardware is faulty. Consult your nearest Mitsubishi representative.
4 - 10

4.3.5
MELSEC-A
Count value is i c r e t n or c
Chock Itom
Corroctivo Action
D
s the counter input specification correct? s the sequence rogram data handled n 32-bit binary?
s the phase setting for the sequence program nput pulses correct?
Is twisted shield wire Jsed for counter input uiring? Are spurious counter values related to the Dperation of other squipment?
Check the counter input with the specification conditions.
Correct the sequence program so that its data can be handled in 32-bit binary.
Set 0 to 4 to the mode register. (The default value is 0.) Use twisted shield wire for counter inputwiring.
Separate wiring of related equipment. Disconnect the AD62C from the ground. If the AD62C contacts the ground, separate it from the ground. Provide CR surge suppression to magnetic switches, etc.
Does noise come in through the ground of the AD62C?

Have adequate measures teen taken against noise in the panel?
Is sufficient distance provided between heavy current equipment and counter input line?
independently wire counter input line. Separate wire in p a d 150 mm (5.91 in.) or more from power line.
Do the pulse input waveform, rise, and fall conform to the specifications?
Monitor and confirm the input waveform using a synchroscope. If the rise and fall are outside the specified values, resulting in a faulty waveform, correct thewaveform.
(I)
If counter operations cannot be executed correctly even if the above check items are correct, the AD62C hardware is faulty. Consult your nearest Mitsubishi representative.
4 - 11
4. HlGHSPEED COUNTER MODULES

4.4
4.4.1
MELSEC-A
AlSD61 High-speed Counter Module
E m r code l i s t
(1) When the FROM/TO instruction is executed, if an error occurs (RUN LED flashes), the corresponding error code number will be stored to the error code storage buffer memory (address 11) as shown in table below:
Error Code cau8e Corroctivo Action
I I
~ ~~
A value outside the range of 0 to 4 was set to the pulse inputmode lo setting buffer memory (address 4).
~ ~ ~~ ~~
Set a value from 0 to 4.
11
A value outside the range of 0 to 4 was set to the counter setting buffer memory (address 5).
Set a value from 0 to 4.
The preset value is h e same as the ring counter value.

~ ~~~~ ~ ~~ ~
values so that they are not the Turn OFF the ring counter command, cancel the ring counter function, and execute the write. Delete the sequence program containing that operation. Set the limit switch outputON/OFF position data so that the values are in ascending order for each dog. Set a value of
~ ~~
14
A preset value or counter value was written do the buffer memory while the ring countercommand (Y13) was ON.
A write operation was attempted to addresses 0 to 3.
102
1 ( )[ ]
I
The ON/OFF position data setting values of dogs 0 to 3 for a channel are not in ascending order.
A value outside the range of 0 to 4 was set in the multidog setting.
to 4.
~ ~~
The error code is expressed as a decimal number.

( ) indicates a channel containing the first error during an operation.
[ ] indicates a dog containing the first error during an operation.

(2) When several errors occur during a single operation, only the code number of the first error detected by the AlSD61 is stored.
(3) Reset the error either by turning ON the error reset command (Y17) or by writing "0" to the data error code storage buffer memory (address 11).
After resetting the error, the RUN LED will stay lit instead of flashing.
4-12

4.4.2
MELSEC-A
RUN LED flashes or OFF

(1) When the RUN LED flashes:
I
I
Chock Itom
Action Corrective
Does the AlSD61 contain data that cannot be written or read?
Read the error code stored in the AlSD61 buffer memory, and take according to the error code.
(2) When the RUN LED is OFF:

Check Item
Corrective Action
*Check to make sure the power is correctly supplied. Try turning the power supply ON and OFF several times. (Also, check ~t noise influences the Was a fault in the hardware (watchdog timer hardware.) error) detected? *When the LED remains OFF after executing the above operation, the AlSD61 may be faulty.
4- 13

4.4.3
MELSEC-A
Counter v l e is incorrect au
Check Item Corrective Action
I the pulse inputmode consistent with the s pulse input settingIn the bufter memory?
I the sequence program data processed as s 32-bit BIN data?
Is a twisted pair wire used as the pulse input wire?
Input pulses consistently with the setting. Correct the sequence program so that the data is processed as 32-bit BIN data. Use a twisted pairwire. *Disconnect the AlSD61 from the ground.
Does noise come in through the ground of the AlSDGl?
If the A1 SD61 comes in contact with the ground, separate it from the ground.
Have adequate measures been taken against noise in the panel or noise resulting Provide CR surge suppression to magnetic switches, etc. from the other equipment?
Is sufficient distance provided between heavy current equipment and counter input line? Do the pulses inputwaveform to the specifications?
Wire the pulse input line independently, and separate wire in panel 150 mm (5.91 in.) or more from power line. Monitor and confirm the inputwaveform using a synchroscope. If t h e waveform is not consistent with the specifications, correct the waveform.
4.4.4
Count cannot be made

~~ ~ ~ ~~~
Check Item
le the external wiring of 0 A and eB correct?
1 1
Action Corrective
~~
When voltage is applied to the pulse input terminals 0A and 0B, do t h e LEDs of 0A and 0 B go ON?
Check the external wiring, and correct it. *When the LEDs went ON,check the external wiring and the pulse generator, and take appropriate measures. the LEDs did not go ON,the hardware may be faulty. In this case, consult your nearest Mitsubishi representative.
Does t h e PC CPU signal that an error occurred?

Is the counter function selection start command (Y14) ON: or is the voltage applied to the F.START terminal?
When the PC CPU contains an error, see the troubleshooting section in the PC CPU manual, and verify the correct operation functions. When the count disable function was set by the counter function selection, turn OFF Y14 or the F.START terminal.
4 - 14
MELSEC-A
Description
No.
N.m
Station number setting switch
*Sets the station number from 01 to 61 by rotary switch. Station 00 is a bypass function. LEDs for operating status indication
CH1, CH2 operating status indication LED
progress indication) ENABLE (count input enable) PRESET (external preset input detection) EQU (external coincidence output operation in progress)
Lit at 2-phasa decrement specification
1
I
Lit when disable input is OFF and count enable is ON Lit and latched when voltage is applied to preset input terminal OFF when external preset detection resetsignal is
ON
Lit when the counter value coincidence signal and the external output enable are ON
LEDs for operating status, and error definition indecation, etc.
LED
Operation state indicator LED RUN LINK R U N LINK ERR. Ring counter setting switch Reset switch I/O terminal block
Confirmation ON: Normally running Flicker: Write data error OFF: 24 VDC is off or WDT error ON: Link is normal *OFF: Link error is detected at power on. ON: Error is detected during link. OFF: Link is normal
1 AD61C hardware reset (initialization)
Switch for setting ring counter function switch
*Terminal block for data link cable wiring, 24 V power supply wiring, CH1, CH2 110 wiring.
4 - 18
4. HIGH-SPEEDCOUNTERMODULES
....
MELSEC-A
~ ~
station number setting switches
Sets the station number from 01 to 61 using rotary swltehes.
~~~~
Description
~ ~ ~~ ~ ~
Station 00 is a bypass function. lperating state indicator LEDs

LED
0A
Confirmation
(Ainputindicator)
Lit when voltage is applied to the phase A pulse input terminal. Lit when voltage is applied to thephase B pulse input terminal. is applied to t h e preset input OFF when the external preset Lit when voltage is applied to the FSTART terminal. Limit switch output function. Lit by turning ON the limit switches of each channel. Turned OFF by turning OFF the limit switches of each channel.
0 B (B inputindicator)
3perating state ndicator LEDs
PRESET (external preset input detection)
FUNCTION
OUT 1 to OUT 8
Merating state, error contents, etc. indicator LEDs

LED Confirmation
.ON RUN Dperating state indicator LEDs

0
.......... Running normally Flashing ....Write data error OFF.. ........ VDC is OFF or a WDT 24
error ON
RUN
..........Link is normal. OFF ..........Link error detected during

power ON.
LINK ERR.
.ON
.......... Detected.
OFF.......... Link is normal.

~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~~~ ~
Reset switch
1 0 terminal block 1
rD62C hardware reset (initialization) switch Terminal block for data link cable wiring, 24 V power suppl) wiring, and I/O wiring. Switches setting between 50K and 10K by shorting or opening these terminals.
Count speed switching terminal
4-20

4.5.5
MELSEC-A
AlSD61
I1
__
~~
Name
Description
50K: Counts pulses at a maximum speed of 50K pps in 1-phase or 2-phase input. 10K: Counts pulses at 10K pps in 1-phase input, at 7K pps in 2-phase input. (The factory-settingis 50K.) Sets the pulse vdtage that is input to Phase A or B. (Ttm factory-setting is 24 V.) Mitsubishi cannot guarantee the module when apulse wmse voltage is higher than the set voltage is applied.
Sets the voltage input to the PRESETIFSTART terminals.ne factory-setting is 24 V.) h
2ounting speed setting ,in

,ulse input voltage setting pin
External input "Itage setting pin

Fuse OUTs protecting Used for
I
Mitsubishi cannot guarantee the module when apulse whose voltage is higher than the set voltage is applied. 1 to 8 from overcurrent.
RUN 0A Lit LED indicators
Lit when the module operates normally. Flashes when a datawrite error has occurred. OFF when a watchdog timer error has occurred. when voltage Lit when voltage is applied to phase A input pulse
terminal.
'BB
PRESET
is applied to phase B pulse input terminal.
Lit and latchedwhen voltage is applied to the PRESET terminal. OFF when external preset detection reset signal (Y16) is turned ON.
ON when voltage is applied to the F. START terminal.
N Cl N NT O
OUTs 1 to
8
0A/eB
ON when a corresponding limit switch is turned ON by the limit switch output function. OFF when switch the limit is turned OFF.
Pulse input terminals ($E is used as decrement count command.)
The terminal in which voltage is & when a preset is executed e ld from an external
~~
PRESET F.START terminal The 3UTs 1 to 8
device.
in which voltage
is applied counter when a
function selection is executed.
An external terminal for switch output used limit output.
4-21
4. HIGHSPEED COUNTER MODULES, :

4.6 4.6.1 Performance Specifications
AD61(Sf)
Item
/O points
. .,
MELSEC-A
Specifications AD61
~~~~ ~
AD6lSl
32 points 2 channels Phase

~~
Number of channels
L
Count input signal Counter Magnitude comparison between CPU and
1-phase input, 2-phase input

~
Signal level (Phase A, Phase B)
24 VDC
~~~~
Counting speed *(Maximum) Counting range Form Minimum count pulse width Set input rise and fall times to 5 psec.or less. Duty ratio: 50 % Comparison range Comparison result Preset Count disable
1-phase input: 50 KPPS 2-phase input: 50 KPPS 24 bits binary 0 to 16,777,215 (decimal)
1-phase input: 10 KPPS 2-phase input: 7 KPPS
Up/down preset counter plus ring counter function
(1-, 2-phase inputs) 24 bits, binary

~~~ ~ ~~~ ~ ~~~ ~~~~ ~~~
(1-phase input) (2-phase inpui
~~~
~~
Set value c count value Set value = count value Set value > count value 12/24 VDC, 316 rnA 5 VDC, 5 mA 12/24 VDC, 316 mA 5 VDC. 5 mA Transister (open collector) output 12/24 VDC, 0.5 A
5 VDC, 0.3 A
0.5 kg (1.1 Ib)
External input
External output Current consumption Weight
Coincidence output
': Counting speed is influenced by pulse rise time and fall time and fall time. Countable speeds are as follows. (If a pulse greater than 50 p e c . is counted by the AD61, miscounting may occur. In this case, use the AD61Sl.)
(1) AD61 (for both 1 and 2 phase inputs) t = 5 ~ ~ - - - - KPPS 50 t 50 P S - - - ~ KPPS
(2) AD6lSl
Rise/Fall T i m
1 Phase Input
2 Phase Input
I t = 500
t=5ps
LIS
I500 PPS
I 250 PPS
7 KPPS 10 KPPS
4-22

4.6.2
MELSEC-A
AOJ2961(Sl)
Item
Sp.cifio.tiom
It0 points Number of channels Count input signal
I
Signal level (Phase A, Phase Counting speed '(Maximum) Counting range From
64 points 2channels
~
B)
I 72%
I
~ ~~
I-phase input, %phase input
24 VDC
I-phase input: 10 KPPS 2-phase input: 7 KPPS 24 bits binary 0 to 16,777,215 (decimal) Up/down preset counter plus ring counter function
2to5mA
Counter
Minimum count pulse width Set input rise and fall times to 5 ps. Duty ratio: 50
Oh
Magnitude comparison between CPU and D61S1
Comparison range
I
24 bits, binary Set value e count value Set value = count value S e t value > count value 12/24 VDC, 316 mA 5 VDC, 5 mA 12/24 VDC, 316 mA 5 VDC, 5 mA Transistor (open collector) output VDC, o.5 A
Comparison result Preset
External input Count disable External output Current consumption Weight kg (Ib) Coincidence output 12/24
I 0.1VDC, 5 (1.43) I 0.65

speeds are as follows.
*: Counting speed is influenced by pulse rise time and tall time. Countable
7 KPPS
PPS 500
250 PPS
AOJ2-D6i(S1) at 500 ps or less.
I f the rise ro fall time is more than 500 ps, miscount may occur. Use the
4-23

4.6.3
AD61C
item
Number of occupied stations (number of occupied points)
r
' ,
MELSEC-A
Specifications
4 stations (32 points)
Number of channels Phase Count input signal Signal level (Phase A, Phase 8) Counting speed '(Maximum) Counting range Counter From Minimum count pulse width (1-, 2-phase inputs) Comparison range Comparison result Preset External input
- 2 channels
5 VDC
1-phase input, 2-phase input
e
0
12vDc - 24 VDC t 2 t 0 5 m A 50 KPPS - 1-phase input
. c
C 6
2-phase input
50 KPPS
v . c
a
C 0
0 0
=
L .
- IncremenUdecrement preset counter plus ring counter function

20 p e e
24 bits binary 0 to 16,777,215 (decimal)
Q e
2 a E k
8'
Magnitude comparison between CPU and AD61 C
. c
24 bits, binary
Set value s count value Set value = count value Set value > count value 12/24 VDC, 316 mA 5 VDC, 5 mA 12/24 VDC, 316 mA
Count disable External output Coincidence output
- 5 VDC, 5 mA
Maximum transmission distance between stations 24 VDC internal current consumption (A) External dimensions mm (in.) Weight kg (Ib)
- 12/24 VDC, 0.3

0.15
Transistor (open collector) output A
50 (twisted paircable 0.3 1nm~4164.05ft)) 100 (twisted pair cable 0.5 mm (328.1 ft))
170 (6.69) x 100 (3.94) x 80 (3.15) 1.o (2.2)
':
(1) The pulse rise/fall time determines whether the counting speed is
correct or incorrect. Countable pulse inputs are as follows.

t = 5 PS t = 50 PS
(2) If a pulse input has greater than t = 50 psec, the AD61C may miscount and cannot be used.
1opWc
' 1ow.c
Rise time andfall time of input should be 5 psec or less each. Duty ratio: 50 * &
Unlimited total distance
(For both 1 and 2 phase inputs) . . . . . 50 KPPS . . 5 KPPS
..
4 - 24
4. HIGH-SPEED COUNTERMODULES
4.6.4
MELSEC-A
Specifications KPPS 10
AD62C
Item
Counting speed switching Number of I/O occupied points of channels Phase Signal levels (0A and 0B) Maximum counting speed Counting ran* Count input signal
I 50 KPPS
4 stations (32 points) 1 channel Number
t
I
I ?:% ]
1-phase and 2-phase inputs 2 to 5 mA 24 VDC 1-phase input
50 KPPS
50 KPPS
10 KPPS 7 KPPS
2-phase input
32-bit signed binary -2147483648 to 2147483647 Equipped with UP/DOWN preset counter andring counter functions
Minimum pulse width that can be counted (Adjust so that the leading edgelfall time of the input is 5 psec or less. Duty ratio: 50 %) Comparison range
Limit switch output
External input External output
t
I
ComparisonN/Ocontactoperation: result N/C contact operation: Preset Function start

I
(1-phue input 8nd Zphaso inpum)
(1-phase i p t t u)
wpbc
71 csc71 psoc (29has. inout)
32-bit signed binary dog ONaddress S countvalue L dogOFF address dog OFF address s count value s dog ON address
12/24 VDC 3/6mA 5 VDC 5 mA Afpoint 0.8 Ncommon
Comparison Transistor (open output collector) output 12/24 VDC 0.1 24 VDC 0.15 A 0.86 (1.91)
Power consumption Weight (kg) (Ib)
' The counting speed is influenced by the pulse leading edge/fall time. The
following counting speeds are possible. If a pulse is counted with a leading edge/fall time that is too long, a counter error may be caused.
Counting Speed Switching .
50K
1OK
I I
Leading Edgelfall Time
1 1-phase Input 1 2-phase Input 1 1-phase Input I 2-phase Input
: I1 ;
Clsec Or
5 KPPS
5 KPPS
1 KPPS
700 PPS
4-25

4.6.5
AISDGI
It.m
Counting speed switching pin Number of IlO occupied points Number of channels Phase Count input signal Maximum 'peed '
1-phase input
, , o , *ii,.
MELSEC-A
Spdfieations 50 KPPS 32 points

1 channel
KPPS
10
1-phase and 2-phase inputs
50 KPPS
50 KPPS
10 KPPS 7 KPPS
Cwntiwraw
Counter Minimum pulse width that can be counted (Adjust so that the leading edgelfall time of the input is 5 psec or less. Duty ratio: 50 ? . 4 ) Comparison range Comparison result
2-ptmse input
32-bit signed binary -2147403640to 2147409847
Equipped withUPlDOWN preset counter and ring counter functions
n
1
32-bit signed binary 12/24 VDC 316 mA 5MC5mA
nmm
~ ~ ~~~~~ ~
Limit switch output
N/O contactoperation: dog ON address 5 count value 5 dog OFF address NIC contact operation: dog OFF address < count value 5 dog ON address
m t
External Function start Comparison OUtDUt
External OUtDUt
~~ ~
Power consumption Weight kg (Ib)
I 5 VDC 0.35
Transistor (open collector) output 12/24 VDC 0.1 &point 0.0 Akomrnon
' The counting speed is influenced by the pulse leading edge/fall time. The
following counting speeds are possible. If a pulse is counted with a leading edge/fall timethat is too long, a counter error may be caused.
SOK
1-phase Input 2-phase Input 50 KPPS KPPS 50 KPPS 5 KPPS 10 K 1-phase Input 2-phase Input 10 KPPS
1 KPPS
Counting Spood Sotting Pin Loading

t 3 pwc Or
less
less
7 KPPS
t = 5 0 psec or
tE500 p88c
700 PPS
250 PPS
500 PPS
4-26

4.7
MELSEC-A
in all
Wiring Instructions When using high speed pulse inputs take precautions against noise wiring.
1) Be sure to use shielded twisted pair wires. Also provide Class 3
grounding.
2)
Do not run a twisted pair wire in parallel with any power line, I/O line, etc. which may gererate noise. It is necessary to run the twisted pair wire separately from the above described lines and over the shortest possible distance.
3) A stabilized power supply is necessary for the pulse generated. For 1 phase input, connect count input signal onlyto phase A. For 2-phase input, connect count input signal to phase A and phase B.
Special caremust be taken to prevent the input wiring from picking noise. up The diagram below indicates the typeof precautions required.
High-sped counter module
Inwrter
Terminal
Metal piping. Never run solenoid or inductive wiring throughttte same conduit. If sufficient distance cannot be provided betweem the high current line and input wiring, use shielded wire for the high current line.
6
AC motor
Separate more than 15 cm from equipment such as invertDistance between encoder and joint box should ers, etc. (Also take care of wirbe as short as possible. If the distance from the ing inside the panel.) Joint box AD61 to the encoder is too long an excessive voltage dropoccurs. Therefore, measure the voltage during operationand checkthat she voltages are within the rated voltage of tha encoder. If the voltage drop is large, increase the sizeof Canmr wiring or usean encoder of 24 VDC with less cur. rent consumption.
48
Connection Example
Ground twisted shield wireon the encoder "de (joint box). (This is a connection example for 24 V sink load.)
I
Power suoply for encoder
I
ncoder
? /
/ the twisted =air shield wire inside the
Connect the encoder shield wire to
joint box. If the shield wire of the encoder is not grounded in the encoder, ground it inside the joint box as indicated by dotted line.
4-27
5. MELSECNET II
5.
-D uc u t
I
-1
I np.ml - 9 - u
I
p J m
-a
P I
MELSEC-A
MELSECNET II
It is important to use a device with high reliability to improve the reliability of a system. In addition, it is improtant to be able to recover from a mulfunction surely within a short period of time. This Section explains the following basic two methods to recover from a mulfunction surely and in a short time.
(1) Link monitoring using GPP, HOP and PHP
(2) Moniroring special relay (M) and special data register

5.1
Link Monitoring by Using GPP, HGP and PHP When link monitoring is designated by using GPP, HGP and PHP, the link state of data link system can be monitored by batch. Therefore, the loop state and the state of master station or slave station and a scan time,etc. can be monitored. The monitoring contents are the same as the contents of the link special relay and the special register. There are monitoring for a master station, for remote I/O, and for a local station. When GPP is installed in a master station , a monitor screen for a master station is used. When GPP is installed in a local station, a monitor screen for a local stationis used. When GPP is installed in a remote I/O station, a monitor screen for a remote I/O station is used. Refer to the GPP operation manual about the method of operating GPP.
(1)
Monitor screen for a master station When GPP is installed in amaster station, this monitor screen is used.
5.1.1
Master station linkmonitor

Displays the operation status of all slave statbns
*LINK MONITORING (MASTER)*
/
L S :LNWCPU STATUS
c:w
D : STOP
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I I;:
P : P.rn CO"
23 24 25 26 27 28
40 41 42 43 46 47 48 62 63 64
R : CPU RUN S : CFUSTOP P-MTR.
B
D
: OTHERSTATON
C : F LOOP
:
30
29
R LOOP
0 : OK
31 32
E : ffi
5-1
5. MELSECNET II
(1)
MELSEC-A
Host station operation mode
(a) Displays the master station operation status 1) ONLINE: Master station mode setting is ONLINE (automatic return function sethot set).
2) OFFLINE:
Master stationmodesetting is OFFLINE, SELF-LOOPBACK TEST, or STATION-TO-STATION TEST. Master station mode setting is FORWARD LOOP TEST or REVERSE LOOP TEST.
3) LOOP TEST:
(b) The selected operation mode is stored in M9224 and M9227.

(2) Loop line status of the station itself (a) Displays the forward loop (F loop) and reverse loop (R loop) status of the master station. 1) OK : Loop line is normal. 2) NG : Loop line is faulty. (b) The loop line status is stored in M9225 and M9226.
(3)
Link scan time (a) Displays the required linkscan time between the master station and a local station. 1) AX : Displays the maximum link scan time. 2) MIN
: Displays the minimum link scan time.
3) PRESENT : Displays the presently required link scan time.
(b) The link scan time is stored in 09207 to 09209.

(4)
Data link system loop status (a) The table on the following page illustrates how the status of loop currently being used for the link is displayed.
5. MELSECNET II
Data Link Status
Data Link Status
Data link in forward loop
MELSEC-A
GPP/PHP Sr Display c m
Forwarb loop
Reveise loop
Data link in reverse loop
Forward loop
Reverse loop
Loopback in forwardheverse direction
I
I
\ .
Forward direction loopback Reverse direction loopback
Loopback in forward direction
' Forward direction loopback
Data link impossible
(b) The loop line status andloopback station are stored in the following registers:
1) Loop line status
: D9204 : D9205, D9206
2) Loopback station
5-3
5. MELSECNET II
/
MELSEC-A
(5) Operation status of all slave stations (local and remote I/O stations) The following describes how the status all of the slave stations in the of system is displayed: "L" column:Statusofpresentdata link "C": Communicating normally "D": Disconnected due to communication stop Possible causes for "D" being displayed: (1) The power supply to the disconnected station is FF. (2) The disconnected station was reset. (3) An error occurred that caused PC CPU operations to stop. (4) A MELSECNET-compatible local or remote I/O station has been connected to a station numberthat has been set with link parameters as a MELSECNET (11)-compatible station (local station). (5) The station was disconnected as part of loopback processing. "P": Parameter communication with master station Linkparametercommunication is onlyexecutedoncewhen starting communications. Possible causes for "P. being displayed continuously: (1) A remote I/O station is connected to a station number set with the link parameters as the MELSECNET mode local station. (2) A local station is connected to a station number set as a remote I/O station. (3) A remote I/O station is connected to a station number set asaMELSECNET-compatible local station with link parameters in the MELSECNET ll composite mode. "C"and"D"dataarestored D9227. in special data registers D9224 to
(This data is the same as the data in D9224 and D9225 when a MELSECNETIB Data Link System is used.) "P" data is stored in special data registers 09228 to D9231. (This data is the same as the data in D9228 and D9229 when a MELSECNET/B Data Link System is used.) "S" column:PresentCPUoperation status UR- . Run . status "S" : Stop status "R" will always be displayed for a remote I/O station. Thedatadisplayed inthe "S" columnisstoredin specialdata registers D9212 to D9215. (This data is the same as the data in D9212 and D9213 when a MELSECNET/B Data Link System is used.)
5-4
5. MELSECNET II
"A" column:
MELSEC-A
An error will occur with the master station for the thirdtier if there is an error in the third tier link parameters set for the station in question. For example, an error will occur if neither inputs (X) nor outputs ( Y ) are set with the link parameters or if the I/O module is notloaded in the slots as allocated by the master station I/O allocation.
"E" : Error Thedata displayed inthe 'A" column is stored in specialdata registers D9220 to D9223. (This data is the same as the data in D9220 and D9221 when a MELSECNET/B Data Link System is used.) "B" column: Displays whether a local station has detected an error at another local station.
"0" :
"0" : Normal
Errorhasnotbeendetected.
'" will always be displayed for a remote I/O station. 0
"E" : Errorhasbeendetected.
"C" column: Displays
The data displayed inthe "B"column is stored in specialdata registers D9216 to D9219. (This data is the same as the data in D9216 and D9217 when a MELSECNET/B Data Link System is used.) the forward loop line status of each slave station. "0" : Normal "E" : Error The data displayed inthe "C"column registers D9232 to 09239. is stored inspecial data
(This data is the same as the data in 09232 to D9235whena MELSECNET/B Data Link System is used.) "D" column: Displays tion. the reverse loop line status of each slave sta-
"E" : Error
'" : Normal 0
is stored in specialdata
Thedatadisplayed inthe "C"column registers D9232 to D9239.
(Thisdataisthe same asthe data in D9232 to D9235whena MELSECNET/B Data Link System is used.)
5. MELSECNET II
WINTS
MELSEC-A
(1) Forwardheverse loop errors of the master station and slave stations are detected at the receive end.
Possible causes for forward/reverse loop errors: (a) Broken or loose loop cable connection (b) Faulty hardware at receive end
(c) Faulty hardware at send end
In the system configuration illustrated below, if the forward loop of L3 becomes faulty, the forward loop cable that connects L2 to L3 might be broken or loose, the hardware at the forward loop send end of L2 might be faulty, or the hardware at the forward loop receive end of L3 might be faulty.
If the cable that connects L5 and R6 is broken or loose, a reverse loop error for L5 will occur.
Reverse loop r c i e end ee v
Break
receive end
(2) If the status of a slave station displayed in "L" column is "D", the previous data in the "S", "A", 'B", "C", "D" columns will remain and unchanged.
5-6
5. MELSECNET II
5.1.2
MELSEC-A
L c l station link monttor op
BWjFROMMASTERPC
1
PBACK *NG
1 RUN 2 RUN 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
X,
I
17 18 19
33
36
37
39 34 35
49
50 51 52
21
* No 4 I
22
25
23 24
38 40
44
26 27 28 29 31 32
41 42 43
30
45 46 47 48
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
61 62 63 64
(1)
Operation mode of the station itself (a) Displays the local station operation status
1) ONLINE:
Local station mode setting is ONLINE (automatic return function set/not set).
2) OFFLINE:
Localstation mode setting is OFFLINE, SELF-LOOPBACK TEST, Or STATION-TO-STATIONTEST.
3) LOOP TEST: Local station mode setting is FORWARDLOOPTEST VERSE LOOP TEST.
or RE-
(b) The selected operation mode is stored in M9240 and M9252.
5-7
5. MELSECNET II
(2) Communication status of the station itself
MELSEC-A
(a) Displays the communication status of the host local station itself. 1) P-MTR WAITING: Awaiting parameter data to be sent from the master station. 2) OK: Normal communication is being executed.
3) STOP:
The local station itself is disconnected and communication has been stopped. (b) The current communication status is stored in M9250 and M9251. (3) Loop line status of the station itself (a) Displays the forward loop (F loop) and reverse loop (R loop) status of the local station itself. Only OK is displayed when a MELSECNET/B Data Link System used. 1) OK: Loop line is normal. 2) NG: Loop line is faulty.
(b) The loop line status is stored in M9241 and M9242.
is
(4) Loopbackexecutionstatus (a) Displays whether loopback has been executed by the local station itself.
1) OK (executed):
Loopback has been executed bythe local station itself.

2) NG (not executed):
Loopback has not been executedby the local station itself. (b) The loopback execution status is stored in M9243. (5) BIWN receivestatus (a) Displayswhether the link relays (B), link registers (W), and link outputs (Y) are being received from the master station.
1) OK (receiving):
B, W, and Y are being received from the master station in the cyclic communication mode.
2) NG (not receiving): The local station itself is disconnected and B, W, and Y are not being received from the master station. (b) The BIWN receive status is stored in M9246.
5-a
5. MELSECNET II
(6) B/W receive status (local station in three-tier system)
MELSEC-A
(a) Displays whether a local station in the third tier is receiving the link relays (B) and link registers(W) from the master station for the second tier.
1) OK (receiving):
B andWarebeingreceivedfrom the master station for the second tier in the cyclic communication mode. 2) NG (not receiving): The local station itself is in a status in which B and W are not being received from the master station for the second tier. Reception will be disabled when M9247 is turned ON.
(b) The B/W receive status is stored in M9247.
(7) Local station operationstatus (a) Displays the operation status of the local station.
1) RUN
: Station in RUN status : Station in STOP status
2) STOP
3) DOWN : Station is disconnectedfrom thelink
(b) The operation status of remote 1 0 stations will always be RUN. 1
(c) The data of local stationoperationstatus is stored in D9248 to 09251 and D9252 to D9255. s (This data i the same as the data in D9248, D9249, D9252, and 09253 when a MELSECNET/B Data Link System is used.)
5-9
5. MELSECNET II
5.1.3
Remote VO station link monitor
MELSEC-A
This section describes the linkmonitor datafor the following two link monitor functions: (a) Loop monitor: The data link status of the remote I/O station itself. (b) Batch monitor: The data link status of the devices that are sentheceived by the remote I/O stations themselves (batch monitored). [Loop Monitor]
LINK MONITORING (REMOTE 110) Displays the operation mode of the remote I/O station itself Displays the communication status ofthe remote 110station itself STATUS (STATION NO.R3) LOOP BACK ON-LINE OFF-LINE LOOP TEST
10 LOCATION 1
-~
.-.
\-
MODE NO * OK YES NO
0
c (
Displays the loopback execution status Displays the 1 0 1 allocation status
COMM. STATUS P-MTR WAITING OK * STOP
Displays the loop line LOOP F OK status of the remote HALOOP R I10 station itself
OK
ERROR NO.
Displays the error numbers
(1) Operation mode
of the station itself
(a) Displays the remote I/O station operation status

1) ONLINE:
Remote I/O stationmodesetting function sethot set).

2) OFFLINE:
is ONLINE (automaticreturn
Remote I/O station mode setting is OFFLINE, SELF-LOOPBACK TEST, or STATION-TO-STATION TEST.
3) LOOP TEST:
Remote I/O station mode setting is FORWARD LOOP TEST or REVERSE LOOP TEST.
(2)
Communication status of the station itself (a) Displays the communication status of the remote I/O station itself.
1) P-MTR WAITING:
Awaiting parameter data to be sent from the master station.

2) OK: Normal communication is being executed.
3) STOP:
The remote I/O station itself is disconnected and communication has been stopped.
5-10
5. MELSECNET II
(3) Loop line status of the station itself
MELSEC-A
(a) Displays the forward loop (F loop) and reverse loop (R loop) status of the remote I/O station itself.
1) OK: Loop line is normal. 2) NG: Loop line is faulty.
(4) Loopback execution status
(a) Displays whether loopback has been executed by the remote I/O station itself.
1) OK (executed):
Loopback has been executed by the remote I/O station itself.

2) NG (not executed):
Loopback has not been executed by the remote VO station itself.

(5) I/O allocation status
(a) Displays whether I/O allocation has been performed by the master station.
1) YES:
I10 allocation has been performed by the master station.

2) NO:
I/O allocation has not been performed by the master station.
5. MELSECNET II
(6) Error numbers
Number
10
11
MELSEC-A
Error
Error Dacription
Counter Measure
A special function module loaded to a Remove thespecialfunctionmodules 1 remote 110 station does not occupy 32 that do not occupy 32 I 0 points. wints.
Special functionmodule hardware error. Replace the special functionmodule.

The number of words read by an RFRP instruction exceeds the link register (W)
12
range specified with the link parameters.
Change t h e link register(W) range set with the link parameters. Change the number of wordsto read by an RFRP instruction.
be
13
Thenumber of words written by an RTOPinstructionexceedsthelink register (W) range Bpecifbd with the link parameters.
Change the link register(W) range set with the link parameters. Change the numberofwords read by an RTOP instruction.
to be
Special function module hardware error. Special function module hardware error.
*O
Blown fuse in the I10 module.

I10 module verify error (The 110 module data in the remote W station is different O from the datarecognizedwhenthe power was turned ON.)
Replacethe fuse in the I module 1 0 loaded to the remote I10 station. Check or replace the 1 0 module. 1 Reset the masterstation or the re, mote I 0 station. 1
21
(1)The 110 module is not secure.

(2) The 110 module has been removed oranother I modulehasbeen 1 0 loaded during operation. 1 1 Neither inputs (X) nor outputs ( Y ) have Check the I 0 modules in the remote 10 station and set the parameters again. been swcified with the parameters.
110allocation error.
22 23
24
(7) Station number

Displays the station number of the remote I/O station to which the GPP is connected.
( 8 ) Number of slavestations
1 I
Checkthe link allocation forthe I/O modulesandthe master station and correct the 110 allocation.
1 Check if the remote I 0 station number is set with the link parameters as local a station and correct the setting.
Remote 110 station specification error.
Displays the total number of local and remote I/O stations connected in the loop.
5. MELSECNET II
[Batch Monitor]
. ,
MFI S F C A
...-----
~~
~~
Displays theON/OFF status of inputs (X)
Displays t h e
BATCH MONITORING
5 3
0
0
(102-lr)
0
0
loo 101 la
Y+R 1 W
-lW
0 0
101 104
0
0
0
1m
lo)
-1sw 1W
1 0 -1454
-13y
m 6
Displays t h e link registers (W) for RTOP instructions
101 107
0 0 0
0 0
lo) 1 0 la,
0 0
0
101) 1Q: 1oE 1w
146%
- 1 W
0 21426
(1)
ON/OFF status of inputs (X) (a) Displays the ON/OFF status of inputs (X) sent from a remote I/O station to the master station.
1) 2)
0: status OFF
: ON status
(b) If the remote I/O station is online, the device numbers at the master station are used for the display.
I the remote I/O station is offline, the device numbers at the host f remote I/O station are used for the display. (2) ON/OFF status of outputs (Y)
(a) Displays the ON/OFF status of outputs station to a remote I/O station.
1)
(Y) sent from the master
: ON status 2) : OFF status (b) If the remote I/O station is online, the device numbers at the master station are used for the display. I the remote I/O station is offline, the device numbers at the remote f I/O station itself are used for the display.
(3) Link registers (W) for RFRP instructions
(a) Displays the data in the area set for data transmission from the remote I/O station itself to the master station.
(4)
Link registers (W) for RTOP instructions (a) Displays the data in the area set for data transmission from the master station to the remote I/O station itself.
5- 13
5. MELSECNET II
5.2
-- Du Uw
FI3!-'l!?si!2
1 . 1
I F l P " l ~
1 .
mc * 4m
MELSEC-A
Monitoring the Special Relays and Special Registers U s e d for the Link Faulty stations in the MELSECNET Data Link System can be found by using used for the link. an A7PU to monitor the special relays and special registers When aAGGPP/AGPHPisavailabte,usethelinkmonitoringfunctionas explained in Section 10.1. Refer to Sections 1.3.5 and 1.3.6 for details on special relays and special registers.
START
1
I
I
J
YES
A <Is the data in 09204 'o'?

Is the data in D9204 '5'?
Monitor D9204 to check loop status.
1
YES
Link line is correct.
<Is the data in D9204 '? >

'1
YES
'
Master station is faulty.
The cable connectin the station stored in 09205 an8 the station stored in D9206 is faulty. Forward loop send line hardware error or reverse loop receive line hardwareerrorforthestation stored in 09205. Forward loop send line hardware error or reverse loop receive line hardwareerror forthestation stored in D9206.
1
to check the number of Monitor D9232 to D9239 to check thefault station and the faulty in the fomard/reverse loop line.
xne
Forward loop line hardware error or reverse loop line hardware error for the station stored in D9232 to D9239, station number setting error, or mode select switch setting er-
ward loop line reor verse loopline for the stationstored in D9232 to D9239 is faulty.
5-14
5.3
5.3.1
Troubleshooting Flow Chart

G n r l troubleshooting flow chart e ea
ERROROCCURRENCE
]
'OFF'
Refer to the section manual. this 1 in
A
Is entire
station lit?
\/
Replace the data link module hardware.
Refer to Section 5.3.2.
number of slave
YES
Refer to Section 5.3.5. Refer to Section
5.4.
5-15
ERROROCCURRENCE
1
Reset the data link system.
NO
YES
Set the link parameters to master station. YES
YES
Correct the setting and re-
YES
Correct the watchdog time (Monitor D9207 to D9209 to check scan llnk time). Does the data
YES
YES
5-16
5. MELSECNET II
MELSEC-A
station.
master station, station
Use the self-loopback test to check the 1, and the final
the loop line.
Use the station-to-station test to check
COMPLETE
YES
If the power supplies of the local and/or remote I/O stations on either side of a normally operating local or remote I/O station are turned off simuttaneously (within 100 msec), the data link for the entire system might be disabled.
If the automatic return function is set for these stations, data communication resumes immediately. However, if the automatic return function is not set for these stations, they will remain disconnected. The CPU for each disconnected station must be reset in order to return them to the data link. Example:
If power supply to L1 and R3 is turned off simultaneously (within 100 msec) while R2 is operating normally, the data link for the entire system might be disabled.
5-17
5.3.3
TmuMeshooting Row chart for when the data link is disabled a a spedfic station t
ERROR OCCURRENCE
Check the link parameters set for the error station.
m
Has the faulty station returned to the system? COMPLETE
NO
I
I
YES
Correct the sequence program and reset.
I
I
YES
Replace the link module hardware.
Has the faulty station returned to the system? YES
COMPLETE
5 - 18
5. MELSECNET II
MELSEC-A
NO
input Correct the and reset.
voltage
I
YES
NO
YES
NO
Change oettin the of t h e mode select owitc! to ONLINE ( 0 , 1) and reset.
YES
YES
NO
station number theSet correctly and reset.
YES
w
NO
YES
Use the self-loopback test to check the faultv station.
Use the station-to-station test to check the link cables on either
I Replace thefaultylinkcable(s).
ERROROCCURRENCE
I
YES
NO
Is data link at a
I
YES
1 NO
I data link s
5-20
5. MELSECNET II
MELSEC-A
NO (remote I/O station)
Place t h e master station and loc l stations in the STOP status. a
YES (link input (X))
Forcibly turn the lo&l rtauon link outwts M ON/OFF
Forcibly turn the master station link outputs (Y) OWOFF.
the forcibly operated outputs
Monitor t h e master station link inputs (X) that correspond to
Monitor the local station link inputs (X) that conespond to the forcibly operated outputs (Y).
YES
YES
NO
Check the link parameter allocation.
Sequence program error. Correct the sequence program.
5-21
5. MELSECNET II
Data link isimpossible for link relays (B)and link registers (W). Place the master station and local stations in the STOP status.
MELSEC-A
Monitor the sequence program of the receive station. Forcibly turn ON the link relays (B)of the send station in the test mode or write data to the link registers (W).
<
I
<
Is there a link allocation error?
Change the link parameter setting or change the device numbers In the sequence program.
-I
5-22
5. MELSECNET II
MELSEC-A
Check the master station
Data link is disabled for link application instructions.
Is there an error in the sequence program?
Is the station In questlon
Is the station
NO
Is there a link parameter allocation

NO
Change the link parameter setting.
YES
Is data link with link devices enabled?
No
'
~~~
Check for errors in the way that link application instructions are (used.
5-23
5. MELSECNET II
MELSEC-A
Place the master station in the STOP status.
YES (link inputs (X))
I
YES
Monitor the master station link inputs (X) that correspond to the
Are the master station lmk inputs (X) turned ON/OFF when monitored?
I No
1
Sequence program error. Correct the sequence program.
Check the link parameter allocation.
5-24
5.3.5
Troubleshooting flow chart for when unspecified number of slave stations become fmlty
ERROR OCCURRENCE Connect the GPP to the master
Turn off the power of dave stations one at a time beginning with Station 1 and check the state of link with the link monitor function of the master station.
After checkin a station, turn on the power of &e station, and then, check the next dave station.
t
enabled?
I YES
There may be a fault between the OFF slave station and the next station. However, if correct loopback is enabled when Station 1 is turned off, the master station mav have a fault. checked?
ered to be faulty.
the link modole whi& is consid-
Conduct the self-loo back test at
&
YES Master station faulty. is
I REMARK^ <
Normal?
>
Replace the data link module.
If it is impossible,to turn off the power of the stattons, disconnect the data link cables to conduct the check.
Check the link cables across a
YES
Replace link cablesat the faulty position.
5-25
'
'
'
MELSEC-A
'
'
'
5.4
Error LED
This section explaings an LED to be lighted when an error occurs in the LED on the front of data link unit. I RUN 0 0 so RUN 0 0 so CRC 0 0 P M R
SD
RD
CRC WER AB. F W E DATA UNDER F. LOW R LOOP 1 2
4
0 0 0 0
0 0 s5
0 0
0 0 0 0
s1
s2
SD
s3
RD
00
0 0 s2
s4
Sl
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
00
sb
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
s7 F. LOOP C W W
10 20 40
TYE DATA UMKR F. LOOP R LOOP
AB. F
OVER
0 0 (S. RUN) 0 0 L RUN
Display
Error N a m
CRC error (cyclic redundancy check)
Error Detection status
Posdble Causes
The code of received data is checked. This errormihtoccurdependi on the timing in which the statior sending the A t a is disconncrcte%m the link. Cable fault, noise, etc. caused the error.
CRC
A set of received datahas overwritten the previousset of data before it was processed. A hardwareerrorwiththedatalinkmodulereceivecircuit occurred.
has
OVER
Note: In a system in which local stations and remote1 stations are I0 1 connected, the 'OVER' LED on the remote 10 station will be lit diml) when there IS no error.
~~~ ~
AB.IF
Abort invalid
frame error
'1' bits are received continuously and the limit is exceeded or the length of received data is shorter than the specified length.
ON
This error mi ht occurdependi on the timing in which the station sending the is disconnecte?fmm the link. Short watchdog time settina. cable fault. noise. etc. caused the error.
~ ~ ~ ~~~~ ~ ~~~
tats
TIME
Time check error
ON
The data link watchdo timer in the master station operates. An errot has occurred at a locay station or a remote 110 station. Short watchdog time setting, cable fault, noise, etc. caused the error. Error code data is received (can only be lit in the test mode). Cable fault, noise, etc. caused the error. Send datainternal intervals. processing is notbeingperformedat regula1
DATA
UNDER
A hardware error with thedata link modulesend circuit has occurred.

Forward loop mor Reverse loop Brror
ON
F.LO0P
The forward loop line has a fault or the power supply to the edjacenl stations has been turned off. The forward loop line cable is broken or not connected. The reverse loop line has a fault or the power supply to the adjacenl stations has beenturned off. The reverse loop line cable is broken or not connected.
R.LOOP
ON
5-26
5. MELSECNET II
~~
5.5
Link Special Relay and Special Register
5.5.1
MELSECNET data link

(1)
Yumkr
Dovico
M9200
LRDP instruction received
M9201
LRDP instruction completed
.
MELSEC-A
Itisrecommended to provide an interlock to stop execution of a program immediately when error occursby using these special relays and a special an register in the sequence program from a failsafe point of view. Special relays link
1) Special link relays effective only for the master station
Description
OFF : Unreceived ON : Received
Turned ON when an L R D P (word device read) instruction is received. Used in a user program as an interlock for an LRDP instruction. Remains ON after the completion of word device read processing called by an LRDP instruction. Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program.
OFF : Uncompleted ON : Completed
Turned ON after an LRDP (word device read) instructior has beenexecuted. The execution results are stored ir D9200. Used as a conditional contact to reset M9200 and M920' after the completion of word device read processingcallec by an LRDP instruction. Turned OFF with an RSTinstruction in a user programafte it has been turned ON. Turned ON when an LWTP (word device write) instruction is received. Used in a user program as an interlock for an LWTP instruction. Remains ON after the completion of word device write processing called by an LWTP instruction. Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program.
M9202
LWTP instruction received
M9203
L W P instruction completed
ON : Completed
OFF : Uncompleted
Turned ON after an LWTP (word device write) instructior has beenexecuted.The execution results are stored ir D920 1 . Used as a conditional contact to reset M9202 and M920: after the completion of word device write processing callec by an LWTP instruction. Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user programafte it has been turned ON. Turned ON when link parameter 01 the station itself is no set or the setting is incorrect. Automatically turned OFF when link parameter is set correctly. Goes ON ifalowertier link usesdeviceranges (B, W outside the range set by a master station, in the upper tie link, for itself. Check is executed only when M9209 is ON.
M9206
Link parameter error in the station itself
: Normal ON : Error
M9207
Link parameter check result
OFF : Normal ON : Error
M9208
B and W transmission range for the station (lower tier master stations only)
Sets whether the B and W data controlled by t h e maste station in the upper tier is sent to the local stations OFF : To the second (sub-slave stations) in the lower tier. and third tiers ON : To the second master OFF : B and W data in the master station is sent to the sub-slave stations. tier only ON : B and W data in the master station is not sent to the sub-slave stations.
5-27
5. MELSECNET II
Number
M9209
Dovice
0Link parameter h e c k instruction (lower tier link master stations only) Link card error [master station) Link status OFF : Check executed ON : Check not executed OFF : Normal ON : Error
MELSEC-A
Description
To be turned ON when the link devices (B and w) used by the upper tier and the link devices (B and W) used by the lower tkw are not compared for 'match'. When M9209 is OFF, the ln parameters for the upper tier ik and the link parameters for the lower tier arechecked. Turned ON when the link card hardwareis faulty.
M92lO
M9224
Turned ON when the master station offline, in the stationis OFF : Offline to-station test mode. or in t h e self-loopback test mode. ON : online, station-toStation test, or Turned OFF when the master station i reset after being s self-loopback test tilaced in the online mode. Turned ON when anyof the following occursin the forward loop line between the master station and the final station: Broken cable Forward loop receive end error in the master station data link module Forward loop send end error in the data link module of the final local station Turned ON when the station-to-station test, including the final station, is executed during the data link. Turned OFF automatically when the error stateis eliminated. *-Turned ON when any of the following occursin the forwarc loop linebetween the master stationand the final station 1 Broken cable Reverse loop receive end error in the master station data link module Reverse loop send end error in the data link module 0: the final local station Turned ON when the station-to-station test. includins station 1, is executed during the data link. Turned OFF automatically when the error stateis eliminated. Turned ON when aforwardlooptest or reverse loop test is being executed for the master station. ONlOFF status depends on the operation status the local of station. Turned ON when the status of any local station in the loop changes to STOP or PAUSE. Turned OFF automatically whenthe status of all local stations changes to RUN or STEP RUN. That is, M9232 is turned OFF when bits 09212 to D9215 are all OFF. Turned ON when a localstationintheexecuted loop detects an error in another station (M9255 ON). Turned OFF automaticallywhenthefaultystation is returned to the normal state or the data link returns to the normal status by switching the loop line. That is, M9233 is turned OFF when bits D9216 to D9219are all OFF.
M9225
: Normal Forward loop error OFF : Error ON
M9226
Reverse loop error OFF : Normal ON : Error
M9227
Loop test status
: Not being executed ON : Forward loop or reverse loop test beina executed
M9232
Local station operating status
RUN Or STEP RUN status ON : STOPor PAUSE status

OFF
M9233
Local station Brror detected
OFF : No error ON : Error detected
5-28
5. MELSECNET II
Dovice
+
M9235
Doscription
Turned ON in t h e following cases: Local station : The devicerange(linkrelays and link registers) outside the range allocated to the master station in the lower tier is allocatedwith the linkparametersfor the lower tier. Remote 110 station : Error in 110 allocation or neither inputs (X) nor outputs (Y) are set with t h e link parameters. Turned OFF when the error is eliminated by correcting the link parameters. That is, M9235 is turned OFF when bits 09220 to D9223 are all OFF. Turned ON while a local station andlor remote I10 station Is communicating the initial setting data (link parameter) te the master station to execute data link processing. AutomaticallyturnedOFFwhenthecommunication fol initial data setting has been completed. That is, M9236 is turned OFF when bits DQ224 to D9227 are all OFF. Turned ON when an error occurs with one local station 0 1 remote 110 station within the loop. (The relay is turned ON while a station-to-station test i s being executed for a local station or a remote I10 station and the data link is operating.) Automatically turned OFF when the faulty station returnste the normal status or the data link returns to the normal status by switching the loop line. That is, M9237 is turned OFF when bits D9228 to D9231 are all OFF. Turned ON when an error occurs in the forward loop line01 reverse loop line of the local stations and remote 110 stations. That is, M9238 is turned OFF when bits D9232 tc D9239 are all OFF.
Local station or remote 110 station parameter error detected
M9236
Local station or 1 remote 10 station initial communication status
OFF : Not communicating ON : Communicating
M9237
Local station or remote I10 station error
loop error
5-29
5. MELSECNET II
Devic. Number
M9204 M9205 M9211
c ru c*
cuh
[ S p m I ~ S l
1 . 1 . 1
MELSEC-A
2) Special link relays effective only for local stations

N8W
D.rcription
~~ ~ ~~

LWTP instruction completed Link card error (local station) Link status
OFF : Uncompleted ON : Completed OFF : Uncompleted ON : Completed OFF : Normal ON : Error OFF : Online ON : Offline, station-tostation test, or selfloopback test
Turned ON by a local station upon the completion of word device read processing cnlled by an LRDP instruction.
* Turned ON by a local station upon the completion of word

device write processing called by LRDP instruction. an Turned ON when the link card hardware is faulty. Turned ON when the station itself is offline, in the station. to-station testmode, or in the self-loopback testmode. Turned OFFwhenthe stationitself is resetafterbeinf placed in the online mode. Turned ON when any ofthe following occurs in the fomam loop linebetween the station itself and the pldiq station: Broken caMe Forward loop receive end error in the station itself data link module Forward loop send end error in the data link module r,l the proceding station Turned OFF automatically when the error state 3s elimnated. Turned ON when any of the following occurs inthe reverse loop line between the station itself and the next station:
M9240
M924 1
OFF : Forward loop error ON : Normal Error
M9242
OFF : Reverse loop error ON : Normal Error
Broken cable Reverse loop receive end error in the data link module r?' the station itself Reverse loop send end error in the data link module 01 the next station Turned OFF automatically when the error state s i elimnated. Turned ON when loopback is executed by the station itself Turned ON when the data from the master station has no! been received. In the three-tier system, M9247 is turned ON when the data fromthemaster stationforthethirdtier has not beer received by a sub-slave station. That is, M9247 is ON while M9208 is ON. Turned ON whenthe linkparametershavenot beer received from the master station. Automaticallyturned OFF when the linkparameter s i received. The master station sends the link parameters to each loca station every time the loop line is switched. Only effective while the loop line in which the data link ir executed is online. ONlOFFstatusdependsonwhether thestationitsel stopped the data link. Turned ON when the data link is established in neither the forward loop line nor the reverse loop line. Turned OFF automatically when the data link returns to the normal state. Only effective while the loop line in which the data link s i executed is online.
M9243 M9246 M9247
Loopback executed Data unreceived Data unreceived
ON : Not-executed OFF : Executed OFF : Received ON : Unreceived OFF : Received ON : Unreceived
M9250
Parameter unreceived
ON : Unreceived
OFF : Received
~~
M9251
Link break
OFF : Normal ON : Break
5 -30
5. MELSECNET II
Dovice HUlnbU
M9252 M9253
MELSEC-A
Data
OFF : Not executed ON : Forward loop test or reverse loop test is being executed. OFF : RUNorSTEPRUN status ON : STOPorPAUSE status
Nanw
Loop test status
Doscription
Remains ON while the station itself is in ths forward loop test mode or the reverse loop testmode.
ON/OFF status depends on theoperationstatus master station.
of the
Master station operating status
Turned ON when the status of a master station is either STOP or PAUSE. Turned OFF when the status of the master station changes to RUN or STEP RUN. ON/OFF status depends on the operation status of a local station other than the station itself.
M9254
Operating status of other local stations
OFF : RUN or STEP RUN status ON : STOP orPAUSE status
* Turned ON when the status of a local station in the loop

(other than the station itself) is either STOP or PAUSE. STOP or PAUSE.
* Not turned ON when the status of the station itself is either * Automatically turned OFF when the status o a l o c a l station f
in the loop (other than the station itself) changes to RUN or STEP RUN. station other than the station itself. OWOFF status depends on the operation status of a local
M9255
Error status of Dther local aations
* Turned ON when an error occurs with one local station in

the loop (other than the station itself). Automatically turned OFF w h n the faulty station returnsto the normal state or the data link returns to the normal state by switching the loop line. That is, M9255 is turned OFF when bits D9252 to D9255 are all OFF.
5-31
(2) Special registers link

1) Special link registers effective only for the master station
D.tr
Description
: :
: :
Stores the execution result of an LRDP (word device read) instruction (M9201 ON). Normal * LRDP instruction setting fault: LRDP instruction Faulty setting of the LRDP instruction constant, source, and/or setting fault target. Corresponding station error D Corresponding station error: LRDP cannot be The designated station is not executing datalink processing. executed in the corresponding station D LRDP instruction cannot be executed by thecorrespopndhg stati0n:thestation designated with the LRDP instruction is s t with the link parameters as a remorte 10 station. 1 Stores the execution result of an LWTP (word device mite) Instruction (M9203 ON). Normal D LWTP instruction setting fault: LWTP instmetion Faulty setting of the LWTP instruction constant. source, andor setting fault target. Corresponding station error Corresponding station error: LWTP canna0 The designated station is not executing datalink processing. be executed in the corresponding station D LWTP instruction cannot be executed by thecorrespopndmg stati0n:thestation designated with the LWTP instruction is set with the link parameters as a remorte 110 station. Stores whether a slave station is compatible with the MELSECNET mode or MELSECNET II mode.
0: 2 :
LWTP execution 3 : Dg201 result 4 :
09202
Stores the status of station 1 to station 16 Stores the status of station 17 to station 32 Stores the status of station 33 to station 48 Stores the status of station 49 to station 64
D9203 Local station link type D9241
* MELSECNET-compatiMestation
D
MELSECNET 11-compatible
station
: ' ' 0 : '1'
D9242
5-32
5. MELSECNET II
D.tr
~
MELSEC-A
Doscription
Stores the current path of the data link.
(1) Forward loop
(2) Reverse loop
Fardloop
Rmrer l o op
D9204
.ink status
0 : Data link in forward loop 1 : Data link in reverse loop : Loopback in toward, reverse direction : Loopback in forward direction : Loopback in reverse direction 5 : Data link impossible
Forward/reverse loop
Y a k
Wn o
1 I
F a a r d rwpb.&
Rm m r
Forward loopback
F a r d lo+&
Reverse loopback
Mas*,
smm
Rv -0m n
'5' is stored because the watchdog timer setting is too small.
The data in D9204 isupdatedeachtime changes.
the link Status
5. MELSECNET II
Number
N8M
D.tr
1
Stores the number of local station or remote 10 station at whicl 1 loopback is being executed.
D9205
Loopback execution station
Station executing forward loopback
09206
Loopback execution station
Station executing reverse loopback
ixample: '1' is stored in D9205 and '3' is stored in D9206.

I
The values stored in D9205 and D9206 are not reset to '0' wher the data link returns to the normal state (data link in forward loop:
Reset the PC CPU to return the set values to ' " 0.

Stores the time used for data link processing (link scan time) by $1 of the local stations and remote I/O stations in the loop currenr:' being usedfor data link.
D9207
Maximum value
' Link scan time definition:
D9208
Link scan time
rmn M-; is1

Minimum value
1A
1
Ls
u m
t
0
L - . i h * l E M ,O
I
END,
09209
Current value
.S
ls
vi
,O
EI(D.0
I
: Sequenceprogramscantimebymaster : Linkscantime (datalink processing)
link sem bmo
station
Stores the total number of retries conducted when a transmissic: error occurs. Definition of retry processing: If data is lost or becomes unreliable due to occurrence of a'dati the transmission processing error, the same data is sent again.
D9210
Retry count
Total number stored

1
Counting stops if the number of retries exceeds the maximum limi
'FFFFH'.
Execute reset operation to clear the data to ". 0. Stores the total number of times that the forward loop is switchec to a reverse loop or to loopback. Counting stopsif the numberof switches exceeds the maximum limi
D9211
Loop switching count
Total number stored
'FFFFH'.
Execute reset operation to clear the data to '. 0.
5 -34
5. MELSECNET II
Dwlca Jumkr
D9212 D9213
MELSEC-A
D. M
Description
1
N8me
Stores the statusof station 1 to station 16 Stores the status of station 17 to station 32 Stores the statusof station 33 to station 48 Stores the status of station 49 to station 64
Stores the status of all local stations that are in STOP or PAUSE.
D9214
Local station lperation status
When the status of a local station changes to STOP or PAUSE, the corresponding bit is set.
D9215
D9216
Stores the status of station 1 to station 16
Stores the numbers of the station that detect the occurrence of an error at another station.
The bit statusof remote 110 station always remains indating RUN. V, Example: When the operation status of station 7 changes to the STOP, '1' is set t bit 6 of D9212. M e n DQ212is monitored, its value is %4 ( ) . o a '
D9217
Local station error detection

D9218
Stores the status of station 17 to station 32 When a normally operating local station detects error at another an local station, the bit corresponding to the normally operating station is set. The bit status of remote I/O station always remains
%*.
D9219

1
Example: When station 5 detects that station 4 is faulty, '1' is set to bit 4 of D9216. When D9216 is monitored, its value is '16 ( 1 0 ~ ) ~ . When the faulty station recovers normal operating status or when the loop line is switched so that the data link returns to normal operating status,the bit is automatically reset to '0.. Stores the numbers of the stations at which a link parameter error sent from the master station is detected by another local or remote I/O station.
09220
Stores the statusof station 1 to station 16
D9221
D9222
Local station parameter mismatched or remote 110 station InpuVoutput allocation error
Stores the statusof station 17 to station 32
09223
U R W UR W U R U R UR UR UR U RU R U R UR UR LiR UR a 63 62 6 1 60 SB sa 57 56 5s 51 53 Y 51 50 49
09223
Example: When station 5 (local station) is set as a remote 110 station, '1' i s set for bit 4 of D9220. When 09220 is monitored, its value is '16 (1OH)'. When the link parameter settings is corrected and the status of ths master station is switched from STOP toRUN,the bitis automatically
reset to ' 0 ' .
5-35
5. MELSECNET II
3evice dumber
D9224 D9225
MELSEC-A
Data
D
NlW
Description
Storesthenumber of the local or remote communicating initial data (link parameters)
110 station#
Initial communication between local and/or remote 10 stations 1 D9226
D9227
* Stores thenumber
D9228
I
When a local station or a remote I10 station is communicatins initial setting data (link parameters),the bit corresponding to the station numberm is set. Example: When station 23 and station45 are communicatinginitial settin.+ data (link parameters), '1' is set to bit 6 of W 2 2 5 and bit 12 r . 6 4 09226. When D9225 is monitored, its value is ' ( 4 0 ~ ) 'an,. when 09226 is monitored, its value is '4096 (1000H)'. When the communication of initial setting data is complete, thi: bit isautomatically reset to V .
of the station(localstation or remote I:'. station) in the data link that is determined by the master static ' to be faulty.
A station is determined to be faulty if the data returned from a x to the master station is not received within the specifiedlengtr. of time.
D9229
Stores the status of station 17 to station 32 Local station or remote 110 station error
I
DBnl
D
VRVRURVRLIRURURURVAVRURURLIRVRLIRL40 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 W Ti..
R U R UR U U R U R U R VR RVR UR U R LIR UR LIR LIR L,.i U 64 3 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
- ..
09230
D923 1
When data is not receivedwithin the specified length of time, the bit corresponding tothe station numberof the l c l station is s e t . oa Example: When an error at station 3 causes it to fail to return the data to the master station, '1' is set for t i t 2 of D9228. When 09228 is monitored, its value is '4.. When the loop line becomes faulty, '1' is set for the bits if the stations downstream the faulty point or for all local stations. When the master station becomes faulty or the setting for the watchdog timer is too small, '1' is set for the bits corresponding to all local stations. When the faulty station recovers normal operating status or when the loop line is switched so that the data link returns to normal owrating status, the bit is automatically reset to '0'.
5-36
5. MELSECNET II
Dovico Humbe
D9232 D9233
MELSEC-A
Stores the station number of the local and remote I/O stations a which an error is detected in the forward loop ln or reverse loo1 ie line.
I
09234
09235
-oca1 station )r remote 1 station 0 oop error

D9236
line
F: Forward loop R: Reverse loop line
When an error is detected at a local station and/or remote 110 station in the forward loop line or the reverse loop line, the corresponding bit is set. Example: When an error is detected in the forward loop line at station 5, '1' is set for bit 8 of 09232. When 09232 is monitored, its value is '256 This error will have been caused by one of the following: (a) A faulty connection of the forward loop cable connecting station 4 and station 5 (b) A fault of the forward loop receive end of data link module in station 5 (C) A fault of the forwardloop send end Of datalink module in station 4 With errors other than loop line errors, such as hardware errors and data communication errors, only the error involved withthe loop line currently being used will be detected. The error status is retained. When data link is executed again with the loop linein which an error was detected, the bit data is automatically reset '" povided that to 0 the fault has been removed. Stores the number of times that the following errors are detected ir the loop line currently being used:
CRC , . . .IF, OVFR. . .- AR .. . .
D9237
Stores the status of station 4 , to 48
(0H' 10).
D9238
D9239
Stores the status of station 57 lo station 64
D9240
bceive mor lstection :ount
Stores the total number of receive error occurrences
Counting stops if the number of receive error occurrences exceeds the maximum limit 'FFFFH'. Execute the reset operation to clear the data to '0'
5-37
2) Special link registers effective only for local stations
D9243
1 Station
D.ts
Stores a station number (0 to 64) Stores a slave station number
0
Doscription
Stores the station number assigned to the l o c a l station itself. Used by a local station to check its own station number. Used by a local station to check the total number of slave stations in the loop. Stores the number of times that the following errors are detectec in the loop line currently being used: CRC, AB.IF, OVER Counting stops if the number of receive erroroccurrences exceeds the maximum limit 'FFFFH'. Execute the reset operation to clear the data to 'Ow, Stores thenumber of the local stations, excluding the station itself, whose status is either STOP or PAUSE.
DNICE
number data of the station itself
Receive error count
Stores the total number of receive error occurrences
Bit
Stores the status of station 17 to station 32 Local station operating status D9250 Stores the status of station 33 to station 48 When the status of a local station is either STOP or PAUSE, ihe corresponding bits are set. When the status of the local s t a i m changes to RUN or STEP RUN, the bit is automatically resef to '0". The bit status of remote I10 station always remains '. 0 . Example: 'When the statuses of local station 7 and local station 15 are eitrler STOP or PAUSE, '1' is set to bit 6 and bit 14 of D9248. Wh9n D9248 is monitored, its value is '16448 (4040~)'. The bit corresponding to the station itself is not set regardless of the status of the station itself. Stores the number of the local station in the loop at which a faull is detected. Only afaultylocal station can detected by another local be station. The bit status of remote 110 station always remains '0".
DEVICE
D9252
I
L32
Bil
D9253 Local station error status D9254
09253 ID9254
109255
L30 L29 L28 L27 L28 L25 L31 L23 Lp L21 UD L l 9 Ll8b-1; L24 L42 L43L40 L39 L38 L41 L47 L46 L45 L U L48 L36 L35 L34 bX L37 L61 LM) L59 L58L64 L56 L55 L54 L62 L63 L57 L52 L51 L50 k4 L53 41 L
D9255
Onlyafaultylocalstationcan be detected byanother local station. The bit status of remote I/O station always remains '0". When a fault is detected at a local station (other than the station itself) the corresponding bit is set. Example: When local station12 is faulty, '1' is set to bit 11 of D9252. When D9252 is monitored, its value is '2048 (500~)'. When the faulty station recovers normal operating status or when the loop line is switched so that the data link returns to normal operating status, the bit is automatically reset to '. 0.
5-38
5. MELSECNET II
MELSEC-A
(1) Special link relays
1) Special link relays effective only for the master station
Dovicr Nwnb.r
M9200
N8M
DIU
I
Description
LRDP instruction received
Turned ON when an LRDP (word device read) instruction is received. Used in a user program as an interlock for an LRDP instruction. Remains ON after the completion of word device read processing called by anLRDP instruction. Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program. Turned ON after an LRDP (word device read) instruction has beenexecuted. The execution results are stored in D9200. Used as a conditional contact to reset M9200 and M9201 after the completion of word device read processing called by an LRDP instruction. Turned OFF with RST instruction in a user programaftel an it has been turned ON. Turned ON when an LWTP (word device write) instructior is received. Used in a user program as an interlock for an LWTP instruction. Remains ON after the completion of word device write processing called by an LWTP instruction. Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program. Turned ON after an LWTP (word device write) instructior has beenexecuted. The execution results are stored ir D9201. Used as a conditional contact to reset M9202 and M9209 after the completion of word device write processing callec by an LWTP instruction. Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program. Turned ON when link parameter of the station itself is no! set or the setting is incorrect. Turned OFF with an RST instruction in a user program.
M9 20 1
ON : Completed
OFF : Uncompleted
M9202
LWTP instruction received
M9203
LWTP instruction completed
OFF : Uncompleted ON : Completed
h49206
Link parameter error in the station itself Link parameter check result BandW transmission range for the master station (lower tier master stations only) Link parameter check instruction (lower tier link master stations only) Link card error (master station)
OFF : Normal ON : Error OFF ON OFF Normal Error To the second and third tiers To the second tier only
M9207
Goes ON if alower tier link uses device ranges (B, W: outside the range set by a master station, in the upper tiel link, for itself. * Check is executed only when M9209 is ON. Sets whether the B and W data controlled by the mastel station in the upper tier is sent to the local stations (sub-slave stations) in the lower tier.
M9208
ON
M9209
OFF : Check executed ON : Check not executed OFF : Normal ON : Error
To be turned ON when the link devices (B and W) used b) the upper tier and the link devices (B and W) used by t k lower tier are not compared for 'match". When M9209 is OFF, the link parameters for the upper tiel and the link parameters for the lower tier are checked. Turned ON when the link card hardware is faulty.
M9210
5-39
Device Number
M9224
1
Link status Local station operating status
Data
OFF : Offline ON : Online, station-tostation test, or self-loopback test
Description
Turned ON when the master station is offline, in the stationto-station test mode, or in the self-loopback test mode. Turned OFF when the master station is reset after being placed in the online mode.
M9232
OFF : RUN or STEP RUN status ON : STOPorPAUSE status
ON/OFF status depends on the operation statusof the local station. Turned ON when the status of any local station in the loop changes to STOP or PAUSE. Turned OFF automatically when the status of all local stations changes to RUN or STEP RUN. That is, M9232 is turned OFF when bits D9212 to D9215 are all OFF. Turned ON whenalocalstation intheexecuted loop detects an error in another station (M9255 ON). AutomaticallyturnedOFFwhenthefaultystation is returned to the normal state or the data link returns to the normal status by switching the loop line. That is, M9233 is turned OFF when bits D9216 to D9219 are all OFF.
M9233
Local station error detected
M9235
Local station parameter error detected
Turned ON when the bit device range (link relays and link registers) outside the range allocated to a master statioc for the lower tier is allocated with the link parameters for the lower tier. Turned OFF when the error is eliminated by correctingthe link parameters. That is, M9235 is turned OFF when bit: D9220 to D9223 are al OFF. l Turned ON while a local station is communicating initia the setting data (link parameters) to a master station to execuf. data link processing. Automaticallyturned OFF when thecommunication fc initial data setting has been completed. That is, M9236 !. turned OFF when bits D9224 to D9227 are all OFF. Turned ON when an error occursat one local station with! the loop. (The relay is turned ON while a station-to-station test !. being executedfor a local stationand the data link is operating.) Automatically turned OFF when the faulty station returns!: normal. That is, M9237 is turned OFFwhen bits D9228 ana D9229 are all OFF.
M9236
Local station initial communications status
OFF : Not communicating ON : Communicating
M9237
OFF : Normal Local station err01 ON : Error
5-40
5. MELSECNET II
Yumkr
M9204 M9205
MELSEC-A
2) Special link relays effective only for local stations
D.tr
3FF : Uncompleted 3N : Completed 3FF : Uncompleted 3N : ComDleted 3FF : Normal 3N : Error 3FF : Online 3N : Offline, station-tostation test, or selfloopback test 3FF : Received 3N : Unreceived 3FF : Received 3N : Unreceived
Dovioo
N8nW
Doscription
Turned ON by a local station upon the completion of word device read processing c a l l e d by an LRDP instruction. Turned ON by a local station upon the completion of word device write processing called by an LRDP instruction. Turned ON when the link card hardware is faulty. Turned ON when the station itself i s offline, in the Stationto-station test mode, or in the self-loopback test mode. TurnedOFFwhenthestation itself is reset after being placed in the online mode. Turned ON when the data from the master station has not been received. In the three-tier system, M9247 is turned ON when the data fromthemaster station for thethirdtierhas not been received by a sub-slave station. That is, M9247 is ON while M9208 is ON. TurnedON when thelinkparametershavenotbeen received from the master station. AutomaticallyturnedOFFwhenthelinkparameteris received. Only effective while the loop line in which the data link is executed is online. ONlOFFstatusdepends on whether the station itself stopped the data link. Automatically turned OFF when the data link returns the to normal status. Only effective while the loop line in which the data link is executed is online. ON/OFF status depends the operation status a master on of station. Turned ON when the status of the master station is either STOP or PAUSE. Turned OFF when the status of the master stationchanges to RUN or STEP RUN. ONlOFF status depends on the operation status of a local station other than the station itself.
LRDP instruction completed LWTP instruction completed Link card error (local station) Link status
wall
M9240
M9246 M9247
Data unreceived Data unreceived
M9250
Parameter unreceived
3FF : Received 3N : Unreceived
M925 1
Link break
3FF : Normal 3N : Break
M9253
Master station operating status
OFF : RUN or STEP RUN status 3N : STOPor PAUSE status
W254
Operating status of other local stations
OFF : RUN or STEP RUN status or ON : STOP PAUSE status
Turned ON when the status of a local station in the loop (other than the station itself) is either STOP or PAUSE. Not turned ON when the status of the station itself is eithel STOP or PAUSE. Automatically turned OFF when thestatus of a local statior in the loop (other than the stationitself) changes to RUN 01 STEP RUN. That is, M9254 is turned OFF when bits D9248 and D9249 are OFF. ONlOFF status depends on the operation status of a local station other than the station itself. Turned ON when an error occurs with one local station in the loop (other than the station itself). Automatically turned OFF when thefaulty station returns to the normal state or the data link returns tothe normal state by switching the loop line. That is, M9255 is turned OFF when bits D9252 to D9253 are all OFF.
M9255
Error status of other local stations
5 -41
5. MELSECNET II
Device D9200
(2)
Speciallinkregisters
1) Special link registers effective onlyfor the master station
DIts
Doscription
Stores the execution result of an LRDP (word device read) instruction (M9201 ON). LRDP instruction setting fault:
A D P execution setting fault ,esult 3 : Corresponding station error
0 : Normal 2 : LRDP instruction
D920 1
D : Normal 2 : LWTP instruction .WTP execution setting fault ,esult 3 : Corresponding station error
~~
Faulty setting of the LRDP instruction constant, source, and/o target. Corresponding station error: The designated station is not executing data link processing. Stores the execution result of an LWTP (word device write) instruction (M9203 ON). LWTP instruction setting fault: Faulty setting of the LWTP instruction constant, source, andlo1 target. Corresponding station error: The designated station is not executing data link processing. Stores whether a slave station is compatible with the MELSECNET mode MELSECNET or It mode. MELSECNET-compatiblestation : '0' MELSECNET Il-compatible station : '1'
D9202 .oca1 station ink type 09203
Stores the current path of the data link. (1) Forward loop
09204
.ink status
0 : Data link 5 : Data link impossible

Fa.d l o o p
R ul o m op
'5' is stored because the watchdog timer setting is too smai;.
The data in D9204 is updated each time the link status changes.
5-42
5. MELSECNET II
N8M
~~~ ~~ ~~~~
MELSEC-A
Doscription
I
Stores the status of all local stations that are In STOP or PAUSE.
Stores the status of station 1 to station 16 Local station operation status

D9213
1
When the status of a local station changes to STOP or PAUSE, the corresponding bit is set. Example: When the operation status of station 7 changes to the STOP, state 1 is set to bit 6 of D9212. When D9212 is monitored. its value is &
Stores the numbers of the station that detect the occurrence of an error at another station.
D9216
Stores the status of station 1 to station 16 - w a l station error detection When a normally operatinglocal station detects error at anothel an local station, the bit corresponding to the normally operating statlor is set. The bit status of remote 110 station always remains T . Example: When station 5 detects that station 4 is faulty, '1' is s e t to Mt 4 01 D9216. When W216 is monitored, its value is '16 ( 1 0 ~ ) ' . When the faulty station recovers normal operating status or wher the loop line is switched x, that the data link returns to normal operating status, the bit is automatically reset to T .
0921 7
D9220
D9221
Stores the status of Local station station 1 to station 16 parameter mismatched or remote I/O station inputloutput allocation error Stores the status of station 17 to station 31
Stores the numbers of the stations at which a link parameter err01 sent from the master station is detected by another local or remote I/O station.
,NUMBER blS b14 b13 b12 b l l blOl b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b l b0. UR U J DQ2Xl U R6 R 5 I1U4 VR3 UR2 U R1 UR0 VR LIR UR U R VR VR VR VR 1 4 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 2
DEVICE
Bit
When the link parameter settings is corrected and t h e status of the master station is switched from STOP to RUN, the bit is automat. ically reset to '. 0 '
5-43
5. MELSECNET II
Dovico
Yumbor
MELSEC-A
Data
Doscription Stores the time used for data link processing (link scan time) by al h of t e local stations and remote I10 stations in the loop currentlj being usedfor data link.
Nam
D9207
Maximum value
1
D9209
1Minimum value
Link scan time definition:
E m
END
L S - 4
END,O
I
END,
,O H
EW,O
I
Current value
Lint
yn h*
4 .S
1
: Sequenceprogram Scan time by master station : Link Scan time (datalink Processing)
~ ~~ ~
Stores the total number of retries conducted when a transmisson error occurs. Definition of retry processing: If data is lost or becomes unreliable due to the Occurrence of a data transmission processing error, the same data is sent again.
Total number stored

1
Counting stops if the number of retries exceeds t h e maximum limit 'FFFFH". Execute reset operation to clear the data to
'0".
5-44
5. MELSECNET II
).vice
MELSEC-A
Drcription
1
lumkr
D9224
Stores M number of the l o c a l stations communicating initial wtting data (link parameters)
station 1 to station 16
Initial mnmunlcatio Whena localstation is communicating initial settingdata(link parameters), the bit corresponding to the station numberm is set. Example: Whenstation 23 iscommunicatinginitialsettingdata(link parameters), 1 is set t bit 6 of D9225. o When W225 is monitored, its value is 64 ( 4 0 ~ ) . When the initial setting data has been communicated, the bit is automatically reset to '. 0 ' Stores the number of the local station in t h e data link that is determined by a master station to be faulty.
A station is determined to be faulty if the data returned fromit to ths master station is not received within the specified length of time.
~~
Stores the status of
n between
D9225
local stations
b
D9228
Stores the status of station 1 to station 16 When data is not received within the specified length of time, the bit corresponding to the station number of the local station is set. Local station error Example: When an error at station 3 causes it to fail to return the data tothe master station, '1" is set for bit 2 of D9228. When D9228 is monitored, its value is '4'.
0
D9229
When the loop line becomes faulty, '1' is set for the bits of the stations after the fault or for all local stations. When the masterstationbecomesfaultyor thesetting for t e h watchdog timer is too small, '1' is set for the bits corresponding to all local stations. When a master station becomes feuly or the setting forthe watching timer is too small, 1 is set for the bits corresponding to all local stations. when the faulty station returns to nomal, the bit is automatically 0 ' reset to '.
09240
Receive 9rror detection :ount
Stores the total number of receive errors

1
Stores the number of times that the following errors are detectedif the loop line currently being used: CRC,AB.IF, OVER Counting stops if the number of receive error occurrences exceeds the maximum limit 'FFFFH'. Execute the reset operation to clear the data to '. 0.
5-45
5. MELSECNET II
D.vic. Mmkr
09243 09244
MELSEC-A
2) Special link registers effective only for local stations
Mamo
Station number data of the station itself Slave station number data Stores a station number (0 to 64) Stores a slave station number Stores the station number assigned to the local station itself. Used by a local station to check Its own station number. Used by a local station to check the total number of slave station! in the loop. Stores the number of times that the follo&gerrors in the loop line currently beingused: CRC, AB.IF, OVER are detectec
D9245
Receive error Stores the total detection number of receive count errors
Counting stops if the number of receive error mxurrences exceed1 the maximum limit 'FFFFH'. Execute the reset operationto clear the data to '0..
Stores the number of the local stations, excluding the station itself whose status is either STOP or PAUSE.
D9248
Stores the status of station 1 to station 16 Local station operating status Stores the status of station 17 to station 31 When the status of a local station is either STOP or PAUSE, !ne corresponding bits are set. When the status of the local stallan changes to RUN or STEP RUN, the bit is automatically rese' to '0.. The bit status of remote I 0 station always remains'0'. 1 Example: 'When the statuses of local station7 and local station 15 are eiher STOP or PAUSE, '1' is set to bit 6 and bit 14 of D9248. W s n D9248 is monitored, its value is '16448 (4040~)'. The bit corresponding to the station itself is not set regardlesr of the status of the station itself. Stores the number of the local station in the loop at which a r - W is detected.
D9249
09252
Stores the status of ;tation 1 to station 16
Only a faulty local station be detected by can another local statim The bit status of remote I/O station always remains V'.
-oca1 station 3rror status
D9253
When a fault is detected at a local station (other than the station itself) the corresponding bit is set. Example: When local station 12 is faulty, '1" is set to bit 1 1 of D9252. When D9252 is monitored, its value is '2048 (500~)'. When the faulty station recovers normal operating status or when the loop line is switched so that the data link returns to normal operatingstatus, the bit is automatically reset to '0".
5-46
5.6
Self-Diagnosis Function The self-diagnosis function checks the data link module hardware and the fiber-optic cables and coaxial cables for breakage. The following is checked by the self-diagnosis function:
Check Item
Doscription
Y L E YELSEC ESG NET NETls

0 0
Forward loop test
Every fiber-optic cable or coaxial cable in the data link system is checked. The fomard loop, in which the data link is established during normal operation, is also checked.
Every fiber-optic cable or coaxial cable in the data link system is checked. The reverse loop, in which the data link is established when an error occurs. is also checked.
Reverse loop test
or two Station-to-station test The fiber-optic cables coaxial cables connecting the stations are checked. For this check, the station with the lower station number is designated as the (master station) master station and the station with the higher number is designated as the slave Station-to-station test station. (slave station)
0 0 0
5.6.1
Self-hpb8Ck test
(1) Self-loopback test
(a) The self-loopback test checks the hardware of each individual link module,including the transmissionandreceive circuits(forward loop and reverse loop).
1) In the MELSECNETDataLinkSystem,connect
the send and receive ports of the self with a fiber-optic or coaxial cable, as shown in Fig. 8.16.
2) In the MELSECNET/B Data Link System, performthis test with a single link module.
(b) If the data sent from send endof the forwardheverse loop the cannot be received at the receive end within the specified period,the loop is determined to be faulty [Fiber-optic cable]
~ ~
OUT
IN
pZGiGl
Forward loop data flow
Fiberoptic cable (2 cores) Reverse loop data flow
1 1
R-RDF-SD F-RD R.SD
OUT
IN
'poaxiai ' cabledata flow Reverse loop
5-47
5. MELSECNET II
e
(2) Test sequence
I
MELSEC-A
START
YES
A
MELSECNETIB?
Connect the fiber-optic cables or coaxial cables.
state.
Select the self-loopba I Reset

I
Whenperforming the self-loopback test for a remote I 0 station, place the 1 master station in the STOP state. Set the mode select switch to the '' 7 position.
When performing the self-loopback test for a remote I/O station, place the master station in the STOP state.
COMPLETE
(3) Test results

The test results are indicated by the LED indicators. (a) Normal
If the test results are normal, the following LED indicators order: CRC, OVER, AB.IF, TIME, DATA, UNDER
flash in
(b) Error
If an error is found, the corresponding LED indicator lights and the test is discontinued.
1) When the F.LOOP, R.LOOP, and TIME LED indicators are lit:
i) The forward loop cable is broken. ii) The forwardloop send endand receiveend are not connected. iii) The forward loop send end is connected to the reverse loop send end and the reverse loop receive endis connected to the forward loop receive end.
(c) When the F.LOOP, R.LOOP, and DATA LED indicators are lit: 1) The reverse loop cable is broken.
2) The reverse loop send end and receive end are 1) The hardware is faulty.
not connected.
(d) When an ERROR LED other than those stated above is lit:
2) A cable was disconnected during the test.
3) A cable was broken during the test.
5-48
(1) Station-to-station test
The station-to-station test checks the cable connections of two adjacent stations. I the data sent from the master station link module is not returned from f the slave station link module within the specified period, the loop is determined to be faulty. Fiber-optic cable1
Master station link
/
module (station n)
Slave station link module (station %+lo)

/ /
OUT Y
---A
IN
2
module (station n)
Forward loop
flow
OUT
IN
L---
1Master station link
7loop Reverse
data flow
Fiber-optic cable (2 cores)
Slave station link
module (station 'n+l')
R-SD F-RD F-SD R-RD
-----A
---- J l
w
I I
flow
. data
Reverse loop
R.SD F.RD F-SD R-RD
w
I I
I
L---Forward loop data flow
L--
Coaxial cable
When a MELSECNET/B Data Link Svstemis usedl

Master station link module
Slaw station link module
5-49
5. MELSECNET II
(2)
MELSEC-A
Test sequence
START cables
IConnectlink the
Set the link modules to the STOP state.
Set station n to the station-to-station mode (master). Set station n+l to the mode (slave). station-to-station
-1
When testing remote10stations, set the / master station to theSTOP state. Set the mode switch to 5. Set the mode switch to 6.
Reset station n + l , then, reset station n. Thestation-to-stationtest is executed about seven seconds after resetting.
Determine the station-to-station test results. I COMPLETE
(3) Test results

The test results are indicated by the LED indicators. (a) Normal If the test results are normal, the following LED indicators order: CRC, OVER, AB.IF, TIME, DATA, UNDER (b) Error
If an error is found, the corresponding LED indicator lights and the s test i discontinued.
flash in
1) When the F.LOOP, R.LOOP, and TIME LED indicators are lit: i) The forward loop cable is broken. ii) The forwardloop send end and receive end are not connected. iii)The forward loop send end is connected to the reverse loop
send end and the reverse loop receive end is connected to the forward loop receive end.
2) When the F.LOOP, R.LOOP, and DATA LED indicators are lit: i) The reverse loop cable is broken. ii) The reverse loop send end and receive end are not connected.
3) When an ERROR LED other than those stated above is lit: i) The hardware is faulty. ii) A cable was disconnected during the test. iii) A cable was broken during the test.
5-50
5.6.3
Forward loop test and reverse kop test

(1)
Forward loop test (a) The forward loop test checks the forward loop after the stations are connected with fiber-optic cable or coaxial cable. (b) If the data sentfrom the send endof the master station in the forward loop cannot be received in the forward loopat the receiveend of the master station within the specified period, the loop is determined to be faulty.
iber-optic cablel
Master station Station 1
OUT
IN
OUT IN
'
;oaxial cablel
Master station Station 1
.
OUT IN
Station 2
Station n
- ---OUT -
I N
Station 2
Station n
R-SDF-RD F-SD R-RD
'r"
R-SDF-RD F-SD R.RD
R-SDF-RD F-SD R-RD

I
R-SD F-RD F-SO R-RD
-------
\
Reverse loop
---
5-51
5. MELSECNET II
(2)
MELSEC-A
Reverse loop test (a) The reverse loop test checks the reverse loop after the stationsare connected with fiber-optic cableor coaxial cable. (b) If the data sent fromthe send end of master station the reverse the in loop cannot be received in the reverse loop at the receiveend of the master station within the specified period, the loop is determined to be faulty.
Fiber-optic cable1
Master station Station 1 Station 2 Station n
-___
OUT
IN
OUT IN
IT
Station 1
OUT IN
TI
OUT IN
T Y
Reverse loop data flow
Coaxial cable1
station Master
II
5-52
POINTI
If fornardheverse loop is faulty, the data link will be established in the reverse/forward loop or the loopback mode.
The forwardheverse loop data link will be recovered when the cause of the error is eliminated. The LED indicator will remain in the error state (lit) even after the forwardheverse loop data link is recovered. Reset the master station and execute the forward loop test and the reverse loop test before starting system operation.
5-54

A Series Training Manual - Maintenance Course

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A Series Training Manual - Maintenance Course

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A Series Training Manual - Maintenance Course

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rim Date

2 ALLOCATION OF I/O NUMBERS

4 HANDLING AND MOUNTING

5 WIRING AND GROUNDING

6 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE

9 BATTERIES AND FUSES

10 POWER SUPPLY MODULE SELECTION

9.1 Battery Lifetimes 9.2 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4

APPENDIX 1 MELSEC-A QC Process Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(a) Input ladder

ladder Output (c)

Fg. 1.1 Configuration of a PC CPU

(d) Input X numbers are expressed in hexadecimal (0 to 9 and A to F).

1 Output is turned OFF.

PAUSE STOP+RUN PAUSE +RUN

I t r a rsby M and Wch N a y L ne n l

Link range for station 1

) The link range cannot be used as an internal relay.

relay in all stations.

100 msec timer

100 msec retentive timer 255

msec T205 contact O OFF

(e) Timer T numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).

T254 reset instruction

T254 coil ON T254 contact

T254 current value 0 --f 1

The C8 contact is operated by the 1350th time X6 goes ON.

Data in X0 to 1F is O stored in D and D l .

32768 to 32767 -2147483640 to 2147483647

(f) Data register D numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).

Link range for station 1 to

W in the link range cannot be used as a data register. (n-2 to 64)

-32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to 21 47483647

(f) Link register W numbers are expressed in hexadecimal (0 to 9, and A to F).

Data in X0 to 1F is stored in RO and R 1.

Higher 16 bits (X1F to XlO)

When RO to 1023 (1 Kpoint) is cleared

(h) File register R numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).

Decimal -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to 2147483647

(9) Accumulator A numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).

When the DMOV instruction is used

DSZ means D(5+Z) = DE

Data in X0 to 1 F is stored in V and Z.

Lower 16 bits (XF to XO)

-32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to 2147483647

Index registers Z and V numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).

.......... When conditions A and B go ON

when coditions A, B, and c go ON

Executed when condition A is established.

Executed when conditions A and B are established.

The N1 to N7 condition is canceled. Executed when condition A is established.

The N to N7 condition is O canceled. Executed independently of conditions A, 6 , and C.

When X17 goes ON, the program jumps to END.

(d) Pointer P numbers are expressed in decimal (0 to 9).

(b) The use o interrupt pointers is shown below. f

16th point interrupt

Sequence start occurrence unit

Interrupt every 40 msec Interrupt every 20 msec 131 t e m p t every 10 msec

Interrupt every 40 msec Interrupt every 20 msec Interrupt every 10 msec